SERVICE MANUAL REVISION 0 JULY 1997 FY8-13F0-000 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
IMPORTANT THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PUBLISHED BY CANON INC., JAPAN, TO SERVE AS A SOURCE OF REFERENCE FOR WORK IN THE FIELD. SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN MAY VARY SLIGHTLY FROM ACTUAL MACHINE VALUES OR THOSE FOUND IN ADVERTISING AND OTHER PRINTED MATTER. ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHOULD BE DIRECTED TO THE COPIER SERVICE DEPARTMENT OF THE SALES COMPANY.
INTRODUCTION This Service Manual contains basic data and figures on the plain paper copier NP6350/NP6251 needed to service the machine in the field. The NP6350/NP6251 is designed to enable full automatic copying work, and comes with the following systems accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting provides tables of maintenance/inspection, standards/adjustments, and problem identification (image fault/malfunction). Appendix contains a general timing chart and general circuit diagrams. The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual: 1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation.
System Configuration The NP6350/NP6251 is designed to accommodate the following accessories: RDF-D1 It feeds a stack of originals to the copier, sheet by sheet. Stapler Sorter-E2 In addition to the functions of the 20-Bin Stapler Sorter, it can automatically staple sorted copies. It also is equipped with a front access function, in which copies may be removed from the front, and a multiple stacking function, in which two or more sets may be delivered in a single bin.
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION iv COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION I. II. III. FEATURES.........................................1-1 SPECIFICATIONS ..............................1-2 A. Copier ............................................1-2 1. Type..........................................1-2 2. Mechanisms .............................1-2 3. Performance .............................1-3 4. Others.......................................1-6 B. Paper Deck-A1 ..............................1-9 NAMES OF PARTS ............................
2. Routing the Scanner Drive Cable ........................................3-26 3. Orienting the Heat Absorbing Glass ........................................3-26 4. Removing the Scanner Drive Cable ........................................3-27 5. Adjusting the Tension of the Scanner Drive Cable ................3-29 6. Positioning the Mirror ...............3-29 7. Adjusting the Scanner Home Position.....................................3-30 8. Positioning the Scanner Locking Solenoid (SL1)....................
A. Scanning Lamp Assembly.............4-39 1. Removing the Scanning Lamp .4-39 2. Removing the Thermal Fuse....4-41 B. Standard White Plate ....................4-41 C. Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit ...............4-43 1. Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit .................................4-43 D. Blanking Exposure Lamp Assembly .......................................4-44 1. Removing the Blanking Exposure Lamp Assembly .......4-44 E. Photosensitive Drum .....................4-45 1. Removing the Drum Unit..........
C. Sequence of Pick-Up Operations (multifeeder) ..................................5-22 V. CONTROLLING THE REGISTRATION CLUTCH .................5-23 VI. MAKING TWO-SIDED/OVERLAY COPIES ..............................................5-24 A. Making Two-Sided/Overlay Copies (1st side) ...........................5-24 1. Sequence of Operations (two-sided/overlay copies; 1st side)....................................5-25 B. Making Two-Sided Copies (2nd side) ......................................5-26 1.
D. E. F. G. H. 2. Removing the Pick-Up Roller ...5-80 3. Removing the Feeding Roller...5-82 4. Removing the Separation Roller ........................................5-82 5. Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation Roller......................5-84 6. Orientation of the Separation Roller ........................................5-85 7. Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Cassette/Deck Pick-Up Assembly ....................5-86 8. Positioning the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid of the Deck .........
II. E. Reciprocating Mechanism for the Upper Separation Claw ...........6-11 F. SSR Error Detection Circuit for the Fixing Heater ...........................6-12 G. Locking Operation (fixing/feeding unit)................................................6-14 H. Error Detection Circuit ...................6-15 1. Outline ......................................6-15 2. Scanning Lamp Error Activation Detection Circuit ......6-15 3. Fixing Heater Error Activation Detection Circuit .......................6-16 4.
E. F. G. H. I. J. K. Duplexing Drive (1) Assembly .......7-44 1. Construction .............................7-44 2. Removing .................................7-45 L. Lifter Drive Assembly ....................7-46 1. Construction .............................7-46 2. Removing .................................7-46 M. Cassette Pick-Up Drive Assembly .......................................7-48 1. Construction .............................7-48 2. Removing .................................7-48 N.
3. Orientation of the Deck Pick-Up Roller ..........................8-45 4. Removing the Deck Feeding Roller ........................................8-46 5. Orientation of the Deck Feeding Roller ..........................8-46 6. Removing the Deck Separation Roller ........................................8-47 7. Adjusting the Deck Separation Roller Pressure.........................8-48 8. Positioning the Deck Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid (SL101).....................................8-48 E.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING I. II. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION.11-3 A. Image Adjustment Basic Procedure....................................11-3 B. Points to Note for Scheduled Servicing......................................11-4 STANDARDS/ADJUSTMENTS ........11-5 A. Image Adjustment .......................11-5 1. Adjusting the Image Leading Edge Margin...........................11-5 2. Adjusting the Image Leading Edge Non-Image Width (registration) ...........................11-5 3.
III. xiv 15.Adjusting the Position of the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Plate .......................................11-35 16.Adjusting the Timing Belt of the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Guide Plate...............11-35 17.Adjusting the Position of the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Plate Solenoid ........................11-36 18.Drive Belt................................11-36 E. Fixing System..............................11-38 1. Points to Note When Installing the Fixing Heater....................11-38 2.
21.E212 (fault in lens Y direction drive system) ..........................11-96 22.E213 .......................................11-96 23.E240 .......................................11-96 24.E243 .......................................11-97 25.E710/E711..............................11-97 26.E712 .......................................11-97 27.E713 .......................................11-97 28.E800 .......................................11-98 29.E802 .......................................11-98 30.
G. Function Mode ( ] 4 ] ) .............11-233 H. Options Mode ( ] 5 ] )...............11-244 I. Counter Mode ( ] 6 ] ) ..............11-253 VIII. SELF DIAGNOSIS ...........................11-259 A. Copier..........................................11-259 B. RDF-D1 .......................................11-264 C. Sorter...........................................11-266 APPENDIX A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ..........A-1 B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS ...A-3 1. Signals......................................A-3 2.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION This chapter introduces the copier’s features and specifications, shows how to operate the copier, and explains how copies are made. I. II. III. IV. FEATURES.........................................1-1 SPECIFICATIONS ..............................1-2 A. Copier ............................................1-2 B. Paper Deck-A1 ..............................1-9 NAMES OF PARTS ............................1-10 A. External View.................................1-10 B.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION I. FEATURES 1. It offers 50-sheet copying (A4, horizontal) and 60-sheet copying (A4, horizontal; 1 original) using the RDF’s stream reading. 2. It has a reduced rate of jamming, thanks to new pick-up and feeding mechanisms. 3 It promises to produce high-quality copies for a long time, which is a prerequisite for all high-speed copiers.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION II. SPECIFICATIONS A. Copier 1. Type Body Console Copyboard Fixed Light source Halogen lamp (70 V, 265 W) Lens Zoom Photosensitive medium Amorphous silicon (80 mm dia.) 2. Mechanisms Copying Indirect electrostatographic Charging Corona Exposure Slit (moving light source) Copy density adjustment Automatic or manual Development Dry (toner projection) Pick-up Auto Front cassette (2) Front paper deck (2) Manual Multifeeder (5.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3. Performance Original type Sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg max.) Maximum original size A3 Reproduction ratio Direct 1:1 Reduce I 1:0.500 Reduce II 1:0.707 Reduce III 1:0.816 Reduce IV 1:0.865 Enlarge I 1:2.000 Enlarge II 1:1.414 Enlarge III 1:1.224 Enlarge IV 1:1.154 Zoom 1:0.490 to 2.040 (1% increments) Wait time 5 min min. (at 20°C) First copy 3.0 sec (A4, non-AE, right deck pick-up) Continuous copying 999 copies max.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Cassette pick-up • Plain paper (64 to 90 g/m2) A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, 11" × 17", LGL, LTR, LTR-R, A5, A5R, STMT, STMTR, Foolscap, GLTR, GLTR-R, KLGL, K-LGL-R, OFFICIO, E-OFFICIO, A-OFFICIO, B-OFFICIO, A-LTR, ALTR-R, A-LGL • Tracing paper* (SM-1) A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R • Colored paper (Canon-recommended) B4, A4 Front paper deck pick-up • Plain paper (64 to 90 g/m2) A4, B5, LTR • Colored paper (Canon-recommended) A4 Multifeeder pick-up Copy paper type • Plain paper (6
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Tray Non-image width Claw None Cassette 55 mm deep (about 500 sheets each of 80 g/m2 paper) Front paper deck 162 mm deep (about 1500 sheets each of 80 g/m2) Copy tray 250 sheets (approx.; A3, of 80 g/m2) Leading edge For Direct, 4.5 ±1.5 mm (for non-default, overlay, two-sided, 4.5 ±1.5 mm) Trailing edge 2.0 ±1.5 mm (non-default, overlay, two-sided, 2.0 ±1.0 mm); if with RDF-D1, 2.0 ±1.8 mm Left/right (1st side) 2.75 ±2.5 mm; if with RDF-D1, 2.75 ±2.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 4. Others Operating environment Temperature 7.5° to 32.5°C/45.5°C to 90.5°F Humidity 5% to 80% RH Atmospheric pressure 810.6 to 1013.3 hPa (0.8 to 1.0 atm) NP6350 Power supply Power consumption Noise 120V 220/ 240V 220/ 240V 220/ 240V 220/ 240V 220/ 240V 220/ 240V (UK) (CA) (FRN) (GER) (AMS) 1.5 kW or less Standby 0.3 kWh (approx.; reference only) Continuous copying 1.2 kWh (approx.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Size Copy paper Copies/min A3(297 × 420mm) A3 25 A4(210 × 297mm) A4 50 B4(257 × 364mm) B4 33 B5(182 × 257mm) B5 50 A4R(297 × 210mm) A4R 39 B5R(257 × 182mm) B5R 44 A3 Õ 5R A5R 43 A3 Õ A4R A4R 36 B4 Õ B5R B5R 41 A4 Õ A5 A5 50 III (81%) B4 Õ A4R A4R 38 IV (86%) A3 Õ B4 B4 32 A4 Õ B5 B5 50 A5R Õ A3 A3 24 A4R Õ A3 A3 25 B5R Õ B4 B4 33 A5 Õ A4 A4 46 III (122%) A4R Õ B4 B4 33 IV (115%) B4 Õ A3 A3 25 B5 Õ A4 A4 50 Rati
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Size Copy paper Copies/min LTR LTR 50 11" × 17" 11" × 17" 25 LGL LGL 34 LTRR LTRR 41 STMT/STMTR STMT/STMTR 50 I (50%) 11" × 17" Õ STMTR STMTR 43 II (64.7%) 11" × 17" Õ LTRR LTRR 38 III (73.3%) 11" × 15" Õ LTRR LTRR 39 I (200%) STMR Õ 11" × 17" 11" × 17" 24 II (129.4%) LTRR Õ 11" × 17" 11" × 17" 25 III (121.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION B. Paper Deck-A1 Item Specifications Pick-up Clawless (retard) Paper compartment Side tray Copy paper • Plain paper (64 to 90 g/m2) A4, B5, LTR • Colored paper (Canon-recommended) A4 Paper volume 385 mm high (stack; about 3,500 sheets of 80 g/m2 paper) Serial number ZHY XXXXX (A/B), ZHZ XXXXX (Inch) Paper size alteration By size guide plate (in steps), in service mode (*5*) Dimensions 329 (W) × 583 (D) × 680 (H) mm/13.0 (W) × 23.0 (D) × 26.8 (H) in Weight 33.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION III. NAMES OF PARTS A. External View w q !3 q w e r t y u !2 e !1 !0 Copy tray RDF Toner supply mouth Original tray/Instructions tray Power switch Multifeeder Upper right door r t y i u o i o !0 !1 !2 !3 Lower right door Cassette 4 Cassette 3 Right deck Left deck Front door Figure 1-301 1-10 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION !4 !5 !6 @1 !4 !5 !6 !7 Fixing assembly knob Fixing feeding assembly Fixing/feeding assembly lever Toner hopper @0 !9 !7 !8 !8 !9 @0 @1 Holding Holding Holding Holding tray tray tray tray feeding assembly knob feeding assembly assembly knob Figure 1-302 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION B. Cross Section 1. Copier q @9 q w e r t y u i o !0 w er t y @8 No. 3 mirror No. 2 mirror Heat absorbing glass Scanning lamp No. 1 mirror Fixing assembly Copyboard glass Fixing web Lens Drum cleaning assembly !1 Pre-exposure lamp u @7 i @6 o !0 @5 !1 !2 @4 @3 !2 Primary charging assembly !3 Potential sensor !4 No. 6 mirror !5 Blanking exposure lamp !6 Developing cylinder !7 No. 4 mirror !8 No.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION IV. OPERATING THE MACHINE A. Control Panel q w e r t y u i o !0 !1 !2 !3 !4 Touch panel display Guide key Reset key Numeric keypad Image contrast key Pre-Heat key Stop key Toner supply mouth Pilot lamp Start key Clear key Interrupt key User mode key Preference key ty u we r q i Image contrast Pre-Heat key key Reset key Stop key 1 2 3 C Guide key ? 4 5 6 User mode key 7 8 9 Interrupt key 10 0 !3 !2 C !1 Start key !0 o Figure 1-401 Ready to copy.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION B. Extended Modes Mode Description Auto Start Use it while in wait state for automatic start. Pre-Heat Use it to turn off the indicators on the control panel except the Power and the Pre-Heat indicators. Bind Use it to select right binding, left binding, top binding, or bottom binding. Frame Erase Use it to select original frame erasing, sheet frame erasing, hole image erasing, or book frame erasing.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION C. User Mode 1. Types of User Modes The machine provides the following four types of user modes: 1. Settings 2. Adjust/Clean 3. Timer 4. Preference [1] Settings Item Descriptions Remarks Auto Sort Use it to enable or disable auto sort mode in response to multiple originals (count of 2 or more) when the RDF is used. Default: ON Sorter Front Access When the sorter is connected, ON: Enable sorter auto front access. OFF: Disable sorter auto front access.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Item Descriptions Remarks Inch Input Use it to enable or disable inch input when selecting binding width, hole margin width, and zoom program. ON: Enable inch input. OFF: Disable inch input. Default: OFF Wait Time Indicator Use it to show or not show how long the on-going copying takes. ON: Show. OFF: Do not show. Default: OFF Buzzer ON/OFF Use it to specify whether the buzzer should be sounded in response to inputs, warnings, standby, and copying end.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION [2] Adjust/Clean Item Remarks Description Wire Clean Use it to execute automatic cleaning of the primary charging wire, pre-transfer charging wire, transfer charging wire, or separation charging wire. Feeder Clean Place 10 sheets of blank copy paper in the feeder, and press the OK key. The sheets will be fed in ‘one-sided to one-sided’ copying mode, thereby cleaning the separation belt and the feeding roller.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION [4] Preferences Item Description User Customize Use it to assign specific modes to keys on the Standard screen. Remarks 2 max. Table 1-405 1-18 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION V. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE BY THE USER Advise the user to be sure to clean the following at least once a week: 1. Copyboard Glass Wipe it with a moist cloth; then, dry wipe it. 2. RDF Feeding Belt Wipe it with a cloth moistened with a solution of mild detergent; then, dry wipe it. VI. POINTS TO NOTE (BY THE USER) • Handling the Toner Bottle Instruct the user to dispose of any empty toner bottle as nonflammable material.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION VII. IMAGE FORMATION A. Outline The machine uses an electrophotographic method, and is constructed as shown in Figure 1601. In addition to the mechanisms shown, the machine is equipped with an automatic control function to control the potential of the drum surface.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION The machine forms an image using the following nine steps: Step 1 Pre-exposure Step 2 Primary charging (positive DC) Step 3 Image exposure Step 4 Development (AC + positive DC) Step 5 Pre-transfer charging (AC + negative DC) Step 6 Transfer (positive DC) Step 7 Separation (AC + positive DC) Step 8 Fixing Step 9 Drum cleaning Static latent image formation block 2. Primary charging 3. Image exposure 1. Pre-exposure 4. Development Flow of copy paper Rotation of drum 9.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1-22 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION This chapter provides outlines of the copier’s various mechanical workings. (Note that a single rotation of the drum takes about 0.79 sec.) I. BASIC MECHANISMS .......................2-1 A. Functional Construction.................2-1 B. Outline of the Electrical Circuitry ...2-2 C. Basic Sequence of Operations......2-4 D. Main Motor (M1) Control Circuitry..2-11 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. E. Inputs to the DC Controller............2-13 F. Outputs from the DC Controller ...
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION I. BASIC MECHANISMS A. Functional Construction The machine can be divided into four blocks: pick-up/feeding, exposure, image formation, and control.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION B.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Sensors/ switches Q156 (CPU) Control panel (CPU) Potential sensor DC controller PCB Potential measurement circuit Motor driver PCB Main motor Scanner motor AC driver PCB Heaters Q160 Q161 Solenoid Clutch (ROM) Lens motor Q136 Q137 Q138 Q162 LED (RAM) HVT Charging assembly Developing cylinder Roller electrode Q2001 Lamp regulator Q158 (IPC) Scanning lamp Fan Holding tray driver PCB Sensors/ switches Side deck driver PCB Holding
, 00 // . , + * CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION C. Basic Sequence of Operations 1.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION 2.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Function Period WMUP (warm up) From when the power switch is turned on to when the surface temperature of the upper fixing roller reaches 195°C. • Waits until the fixing assembly warms up. INTR (initial total rotation) From when WMUP ends until when CNTR1 starts after the surface temperature of the upper fixing roller has reached 195°C. • Evens out the surface temperature of the fixing roller. • Discharges copy paper, if any.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION 3.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Period Function Remarks INTR (initial rotation) From when the Copy Start key is pressed to when CNTR1 starts. Stabilizes the sensitivity of the drum in preparation for copying. • Executed when moving the lens. If the lens fails to reach a specific position within a specific period of time, INTR is continued until the lens is correctly positioned. CNTR1 (control rotation 1) For about 5 sec after the end of INTR. Controls the drum surface potential VD.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION 4. Basic Sequence of Operations in Page Separation Mode When making copies in page separation mode, the original on the left on the copyboard is copied (SCFW1) and then the original on the right (SCFW2). If the copy count is ‘2’ or higher, the original on the left on the copyboard is copied for as many copies as specified, and then the original on the right for as many copies. In page separation mode, the copier’s AE mode (if ON) is used.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Period Function Remarks • The registration signal is generated to move the copy paper to the transfer assembly. • The pick-up signal is generated to pick up the next sheet. SCFW1 (scanner forward 1; copying original on left) While the scanner is moving forward • The distance over which the scanner moves forward varies according to copy paper size and ratio.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION D. Main Motor (M1) Control Circuitry 1. Outline Figure 2-107 is a block diagram showing the main motor control circuitry, which has the following functions: q Turning off and on the main motor. w Controlling the main motor to a specific speed. The main motor is a DC motor equipped with a built-in clock pulse generator which generates clock pulses (MMCLK) when the motor rotates in numbers corresponding to the revolution.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION 2. Operation a. Turning On and Off When the main motor drive signal (M1ON) goes ‘1’, the phase comparison circuit and the frequency circuitry shown in Figure 2-107 send control signals. The control signals from both circuits are combined and sent to the motor drive circuit, turning on the motor drive circuit and rotating the main motor. When M1ON goes ‘0’, on the other hand, the output of the control signal stops and remains so, keeping the motor stationary. b.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION E. Inputs to the DC Controller Inputs to the DC controller (1/8) DC controller PCB +5V Scanner home position sensor PS1 J728-1 -2 -3 J727-3 -2 -1 J111A-1 -2 -3 SCHP When the scanner is at home position, '1'. (When the light-blocking plate is at PS1.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Inputs to the DC controller (2/8) DC controller PCB +5V External delivery PS10 sensor Fixing cleaning belt length sensor PS11 J2747-1 J2755-32 -2 -33 -3 -34 J742 J2743-1 -3 -2 -2 -3 -1 J108B-8 -7 -6 J2757 J2755 -5 -14 -4 -13 -3 -12 EXDPD +5V J108A-14 -13 -12 CBOP +5V Internal delivery PS12 sensor Holding tray registration paper sensor Holding tray inlet paper sensor PS14 PS15 J2751-1 J2755-27 -2 -28 -3 -29 J108B-13 -12 -11 J7581 J762-1 -3 -2 -2 -3 -1 J758 -4 -5 -6
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Inputs to the DC Controller (3/8) DC controller PCB Holding tray Y home position sensor Holding tray X home position sensor PS20 PS21 J752-1 -2 -3 J2081 -3 -2 -1 J202A J208-3 -2 -1 J750-1 -2 -3 J210-3 -2 -1 -5 J113A -10 J202B J113B -13 -1 Holding tray control PCB Multifeeder paper sensor Registration paper sensor PS22 PS23 J791-1 -2 -3 J2741-1 -2 -3 J2738 -7 -6 -5 J789-6 -5 -4 J115B-8 -7 -6 J2756-10 -9 -8 J108A-8 -7 -6 When the side guide is at PS20, '1'.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Inputs to the DC Controller (4/8) DC controller PCB +5V Pick-up vertical path 4 PS30 sensor J818-1 -2 -3 J816-5 -4 -3 J130B-5 -4 -3 Right deck lifter position sensor J795-1 -2 -3 J793-5 -4 -3 J116A-3 -4 -5 J796-1 -2 -3 -8 -7 -6 J116A-8 -7 -6 PS30D When PS30 has detected copy paper, '1'. (When the light-blocking plate is at PS30.) +5V PS31 RDLTP When PS31 has detected the lifter, '1'. (When the light-blocking plate is at PS31.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Inputs to the DC Controller (5/8) DC controller PCB +5V Left deck open/closed PS40 sensor J845-1 -2 -3 J844-3 -2 -1 J121A-3 -2 -1 Upper right door sensor J839-1 -2 -3 J838-5 -4 -3 J119B-5 -4 -3 J840-1 -2 -3 -8 -7 -6 J119B-8 -7 -6 J725-1 J7252-1 -2 -2 -3 -3 J105A-10 -9 -8 Fixing assembly outlet PS47 paper sensor J2748-1 J7255-35 -2 -36 -3 -37 J108B-5 -4 -3 Scanner locked sensor J7741-1 J7741-3 -2 -2 -3 -1 J114-15 -14 -13 Left deck outlet paper PS49 sensor J8492
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Inputs to the DC Controller(6/8) DC controller PCB SW2 J714-2 J104A-4 Front door switch -1 FDOD When the front door is open, '1'. -3 +5V J745-3 J738-6 Original size detection 1 DS1 J110B-6 -2 -5 -5 -1 -4 -4 DSZ1 Varies according to the size of the original. +5V J746-3 J738-9 Original size detection 2 DS2 J110B-9 -2 -8 -8 -1 -7 -7 J747-4 J738-13 -12 -3 -11 -2 -10 -1 J110B-13 -12 -11 -10 DSZ2 Varies according to the size of the original.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Inputs to the DC Controller (7/8) DC controller PCB +5V Multifeeder paper width detection SVR1 J792-1 -2 -3 SVR2 J826-1 -2 -3 J789-3 -2 -1 J115B-3 -4 -5 MFPW Varies according to the size of copy paper. +5V Cassette 3 paper width detection J117B-11 -10 -9 C3PW Varies according to the size of copy paper. +5V Cassette 4 paper width detection SVR3 J117A-13 -12 -11 J828-1 -2 -3 C4PW Varies according to the size of copy paper.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Inputs to the DC Controller (8/8) DC controller PCB +5V Cassette 3 paper length detection SV1 J827-4 -1 -2 -3 J122A-4 -1 -2 -3 J829-4 -1 -2 -3 J122B-4 -1 -2 -3 C3PL0 C3PL1 Varies according to the length of copy paper. +5V Cassette 4 paper length detection SV2 C4PL0 C4PL1 Varies according to the length of copy paper.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION F. Outputs from the DC Controller Outputs from the DC Controller (1/11) DC controller PCB J714-2 -1 J104A-4 -3 J716-2 -1 -7 -8 CB1 Power unit FDOD +12V When '1', the front door is open. When '0', the PWOFF* power switch is OFF.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Controller (2/11) DC controller PCB J601-1 38V -2 M1 Main motor From power supply unit 0V 5V J602-12 J733-3 J111B-2 -11 -4 -3 -14 -5 -4 -13 -2 -1 J611-1 38V -2 0V M1FG M1ON From power supply unit 5V M2 Pick-up motor J612-1 J114B-10 -3 -12 -8 -5 -7 -6 -6 -7 -5 -8 -4 -9 -2 -11 J631-1 38V -2 0V 5V M2BRK M2FG M2H/L M2ON From power supply unit 5V Scanner motor M3 J632-11 J778-3 J112B-2 -12 -2 -1 -9 -5 -4 -
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Controller (3/11) DC controller PCB J739 J741 Lens (X) motor M4 J736 J110A-3 -1 -2 -3 -6 -4 -5 -6 -2 -1 -4 -5 X-HOLD M4_A M4_A* M4_B M4_B* While M16 is rotating, alternates between '1' and '0'. (pulse signal) J736 J740 J110A-12 -1 Lens (Y) motor M5 Y-HOLD -15 -2 -3 -10 -4 -5 -6 -11 -13 -14 M5_A M5_A* M5_B M5_B* While M17 is rotating, alternates between '1' and '0'.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Controller (4/11) DC controller PCB J754 Holding tray re-circulating lever motor J755-1 -2 M7 -4 -5 J2071 -4 -5 J209-1 Holding tray (X) motor J751-1 -2 -3 -4 M8 -5 -6 -2 J207 -4 -5 J113A-9 J113A-13 -3 -12 -4 -5 -11 -6 M7ON While the motor is rotating, alternates between '1' and '0'. M8_HLD When '1', M8 stops.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Controller (5/11) DC controller PCB 24V M10 J719-1 -2 J770-1 -2 J105A-1 -2 M11 J720-1 -2 -3 -4 J105A-3 -4 Primary charging wire cleaning motor M12 J713-1 -2 J103B-3 -4 Pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor M13 J709-1 -2 J103A-1 -2 Cassette 3 lifter motor M14 J842-1 J841-4 -5 -2 Cassette 4 lifter motor M15 J843-1 -2 Right deck lifter motor M18 Left deck lifter motor M19 Hopper motor (stirring) M10ON* When '0', M10 turns on.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Controller (6/11) DC controller PCB Heat exhaust fan FM2 J704-1 -2 J117B-12 -13 FM2D At 12 V, half-speed rotation; 24 V, full-speed oration. Fixing heat exhaust fan FM3 J710-1 -2 J104A-1 -2 FM3D At 24 V, ON. Developing fan FM5 J784-1 -2 J115A-1 -2 FM5D At 24 V, ON. Feeding fan FM6 J109-1 -2 J109-1 -2 FM6D 12 V, half-speed rotation; at 24 V, full-speed rotation.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Controller (7/11) DC controller PCB 24V Holding tray feeding 1 CL1 clutch J870-2 J112A-6 -1 -7 HTF1CD* When '0', CL1 turns on. 24V Holding tray feeding 2 CL2 clutch J871-2 J112A-8 -1 -9 J764 Holding tray registration CL3 clutch Holding tray reversing CL4 clutch Holding tray forward clutch CL5 Holding tray separation CL6 clutch HTF2CD* When '0', CL2 turns on. J113B-7 HTRGCD* When '0', CL3 turns on.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Controller (8/11) DC controller PCB Pick-up vertical path roller 3 drive clutch 24V CL11 J810-1 -2 J809-1 -2 J117B-1 -2 CL12 J813-1 -2 J812-1 -2 J130A-1 -2 CL13 J817-1 -2 J816-1 -2 J130B-1 -2 CL14 J794-1 -2 J793-1 -2 J116A-1 -2 CL15 J819-1 -2 CL16 J846-1 -2 CL18 J787-1 -2 CL11D* When '0', CL11 turns on. 24V Cassette 4 pick-up clutch Pick-up vertical path roller 4 drive clutch C4PUCD* When '0', CL12 turns on.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Controller (9/11) DC controller PCB 24V Scanner locking solenoid SL1 J774-1 -2 SL2 J2749-2 -1 J114A-11 -12 SLCKSD* When '0', SL1 turns on. 24V Delivery paper deflecting plate solenoid J2755-31 -30 J108B-9 -10 DPDSD* When '0', SL2 turns on.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Controller (10/11) DC controller PCB 24V Cassette 3 pick-up roller releasing solenoid SL11 J822-1 -2 J117A-9 -10 C3PURR* When '0', SL11 turns on. 24V Cassette 4 pick-up roller releasing solenoid SL12 J823-1 -2 J130A-9 -10 SL13 J2754-1 -2 J108B-1 -2 SL14 J2746-1 -2 J108A-10 -11 C4PURR* When '0', SL12 turns on. 24V Fixing/feeding unit locking solenoid FFULSD* When '0', SL13 turns on.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION Outputs from the DC Controller (11/11) DC controller PCB 24V Counter 1 CNT1 J718-1 -2 J104B-1 -2 TCNTD* When '0', the total counter turns on. 24V Counter 2 (accessory) J7181-1 -2 CNT2 J104B-7 -6 When '0', the accessory OPCNTD* counter turns on.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION G. Inputs to and Outputs from Accessories (1/1) DC controller PCB J772 To RDF -1 -2 -3 -4 -7 -8 J7710-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 J115A-5 -6 -7 -8 -9 10 -11 -12 -9 -10 -6 J887-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 24VU 0VU From power 24VA supply unit 0VA 38VU TXD GND See the RDF Service Manual. RXD GND FG RFEDGE J3003 To side paper deck (Paper Deck-A1) J2001 See Chapter 8.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM This chapter discusses the principles of operation used for the copier's lens drive unit and scanner drive unit. It also explains the timing at which these drive units are operated, and shows how they may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted. I. II. III. OUTLINE OF OPERATION ................3-1 A. Varying the Reproduction Ratio.....3-1 LENS DRIVE SYSTEM ......................3-2 A. Moving of the Lens ........................3-2 SCANNER DRIVE SYSTEM ..............3-6 A.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM I. OUTLINE OF OPERATION A. Varying the Reproduction Ratio The reproduction ratio in the axial direction of the drum is varied by the lens drive system, while that in the peripheral direction of the drum is varied by the scanner drive system and the main drive system. The lens drive system uses a zoom lens, which varies the reproduction ratio in the drum axial direction by changing the focal distance and the position of the lens as shown in Figure 3-101.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM II. LENS DRIVE SYSTEM A. Movement of the Lens 1. Outline of the Movement The copier uses center reference, in which copy paper is picked up and fed in relation to the center of the feeding paths and originals are placed in relation to the rear of the machine (when using the copyboard cover). As such, the lens is moved in Y (vertical) direction even in Direct mode to suit the width of copy paper.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 2. Moving the Lens a. Moving the Lens in Y (vertical) Direction The machine’s lens is mounted on a lens stage, which is moved in Y (vertical direction) when the lens Y motor (M5) is rotated. b. Moving the Lens in the X (horizontal) Direction The lens X motor (M4) mounted behind the lens stage is used to move the lens in X (horizontal) direction. 3. Lens Motor Control Circuit The lens X motor (M4) and the lens Y motor (M5) are 4-phase stepping motors.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 4. Moving the Lens a. At Power-On When the power switch is turned on, the lens X motor (M4) starts to rotate, and the lens moves in the direction of the lens X home position sensor (PS6). Then the lens Y motor (M5) rotates to move the lens in the direction of the lens Y home position sensor (PS7).
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM Light-blocking belt Lens Lens stage Light-blocking belt Lens Y position sensor (PS7) X direction Cam plate Signal plate Cam groove Lens Y motor (M5) Signal plate Lens X home position sensor (PS6) Y direction Lens X home position signal Lens X motor drive signal Lens Y motor drive signal Lens Y home position signal Lens X motor (M4) Enlarge Reduce DC controller PCB Figure 3-205 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM III. SCANNER DRIVE SYSTEM A. Scanner Movement 1. Outline of Movement The scanner is moved forward or in reverse by changing the direction of rotation of the scanner motor (M3). The speed of rotation of the scanner motor when the scanner is moving forward varies according to the selected reproduction ratio. The speed of the scanner motor when the scanner is moving in reverse is 2.9 times the speed when the scanner is moving forward regardless of the selected reproduction ratio.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM The scanner is slowed down as soon as the signal plate has reached the scanner original leading edge 1 sensor (PS3); brakes are applied when it reaches the scanner home position sensor (PS1) so that it stops at its home position. When stream reading mode is selected with the RDF in use, the scanner original leading edge 2 sensor (PS4) is used to find out whether the No. 1 mirror mount of the scanner has reached a specific position.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3. Basic Sequence of Operations The distance over which the scanner moves is determined by the microprocessor based on the copy size, reproduction ratio, and copying mode. The microprocessor computes the dimensions of the original when determining the distance over which the scanner moves forward.
, , CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 4.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM Reference: If two or more mode is selected, the scanner is controlled based on the minimum value of the sizes which have been measured. The microprocessor exerts control based on the size of the original when any of the following modes has been selected: Mode Size used • RDF in use Size of original detected by feeder • Original frame erase mode Size of original specified by user Table 3-302 3-10 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 5. Movement of the Scanner with the RDF in Use (A4, 2 originals, 1 copy) Copy Start key ON INTR Scanner home position signal (PS1) Copier Original leading edge sensor 1 (PS3) Original leading edge sensor 2 (PS4) SCFW SCRV LSTR FD Scanner motor (M3) Scanning lamp (LA1) Scanner locking solenoid (SL1) RDF SCFW Belt motor (M3) Image leading signal* *Generated by the RDF to match RDF and copier registration. Figure 3-304 a.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM b. Stream Reading with the RDF in Use Originals 1 2 1 RDF 2 Copier Scanner wThe Copy Start key is pressed. The 2nd original is picked up from the right. The scanner moves to the center of the copyboard, and is locked in place by the scanner locking solenoid. 1 qOriginals are placed. 2 2 eThe RDF sends the image leading edge signal to the copier when the leading edge of the 2nd original moves right next to the scanner.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 6. Movement of the Scanner with the RDF in Use (A4, 2 copies) Copy Start SC SC INTR SCFW SC RV SCFWSCFW RV SCFW RV LSTR *1 Scanner home position signal (PS1) Copier Scanner image leading edge signal 1 (PS3) Scanner image leading edge signal 2 (PS4) Scanner motor (M3) Scanning lamp (LA1) RDF Scanner locking solenoid (SL1) Belt motor (M3) Image leading signal *2 *1 *2 *1 Scanner fixed. *2 Scanner moving. Figure 3-306 a.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3-14 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
b. Combination of Stream Reading and Normal Scanning (A4, 2 originals, multiple copies) Originals 1 2 1 1 RDF 2 1 Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.com 2 2 Scanner 1) Originals are placed. 2) The Copy Start key is pressed. The 2nd original is picked up. The scanner moves to the center of the copyboard, and is locked in place by the scanner locking solenoid.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3-16 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 7. Scanner Motor (M3) Control Circuit a. Outline Figure 3-308 shows the circuit used to control the scanner motor, and the circuit has the following functions. q Turning on and off the scanner motor. w Controlling the direction of rotation of the scanner motor. e Controlling the speed of rotation of the scanner motor. b. Stopping the Rotation of the Motor When the scanner motor drive control signal (M3ON) goes ‘0’, the drive circuit turns off so that the motor does not rotate. c.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM d. Moving the Scanner in Reverse When the scanner motor drive signal (M3ON) goes ‘1’ and the scanner forward signal (M3F/R) goes ‘1’, the drive circuit turns on to rotate the scanner motor in counterclockwise direction, thereby moving the scanner in reverse. e. Controlling the Speed of Rotation of the Scanner Motor The DC microprocessor on the DC controller PCB sends the scanner speed signal (M3FS) to the scanner motor driver PCB according to the selected reproduction ratio.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM Copy Start key ON INTR SCFW SCRV LSTR Scanner motor drive signal *1 Scanner forward signal Scanner speed control signal *2 Scanner stop signal Scanner home position sensor Scanner original leading edge 1 sensor *1 Brakes to slow down. *2 Brakes to stop. Figure 3-309 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM IV. OTHERS A. Original Size Detection 1. Outline of Detection The machine is equipped with auto paper selection and auto ratio selection functions, which necessitate the identification of the size of originals. As many as four original detection circuits are mounted under the copyboard glass (Figure 3-401). The outputs of these circuits are checked by the DC controller when the copyboard cover is closed so as to identify the original as being A3, B4, A4, or B5.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 2. Operation The DC controller PCB measures the outputs of the original detection circuits at intervals of 0.2 sec until the Copy Start key is pressed or for 15 sec after the copyboard cover open/closed sensor (PS5) has turned on while the copyboard cover is being closed. ,, ,, , Copyboard cover Original 30° (approx.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3. Size of Originals The DC controller identifies the size of various originals with reference to combinations of original detection signals (DSIZE0 through 3).
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM V. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Here, the copier is discussed in terms of its mechanical characteristics and operation and how to disassemble and assemble it. Be sure to observe the following for disassembly/assembly work: 1. ! Disconnect the power plug for safety before starting disassembly/assembly work. 2. Unless otherwise noted, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them. 3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM A. Scanner Drive Assembly 1. 1) 2) 3) Removing the Scanner Drive Motor Remove the RDF/copyboard cover. Remove the machine’s rear cover. Remove the three mounting screws each, and remove the RDF/copyboard cover. Caution: The mounting screws used on the RDF/copyboard cover are longer than others. 4) 5) 6) 7) Remove the rear upper cover. Remove the rear right cover. Remove the multifeeder assembly.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 8) Remove the mounting screw r, and remove the RDF/copyboard cover detection assembly t. t r Figure 3-503 9) Remove the three mounting screws y, and disconnect the two connectors u; then, remove the scanner drive motor assembly i. y i u y Figure 504 Caution: A drive belt is on the gear of the motor shaft; remove the motor while detaching the belt.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 2. Routing the Scanner Drive Cable 1 2 6 3 Steel ball 4 Wind eight times. 2 6 8 Fix temporarily. 7 5 Figure 3-505 3. Orienting the Heat Absorbing Glass Be sure to orient the heat absorbing glass whenever replacing the heat absorbing glass. (rear) White paint (front) 3-26 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 4. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Removing the Scanner Drive Cable Remove the upper right cover, left cover, rear cover, and rear upper cover. Remove the copyboard glass. Remove the control panel. Remove the RDF rear right mount. (See p. 3-24.) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the scanner locking disc w. w q Figure 3-506 6) Disconnect the three connectors of the potential control PCB, and disconnect the connector of the service switch.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 8) Remove the two cable fixing screws (rear) y from the No. 1 mirror mount. y Figure 3-508 9) Remove the two cable fixing screws (front) from the No. 1 mirror mount. u Figure 3-509 10) Loosen the tension screw i to loosen the scanner cable. i Figure 3-510 11) Remove the scanner cable. 3-28 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 5. Adjusting the Tension of the Scanner Drive Cable If you have replaced the scanner drive cable, be sure to perform the following to adjust the tension: 1) Remove the five mounting screws, and remove the upper left cover. 2) Loosen the fixing screw on the tension spring bracket.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3) Loosen the two screws on the metal clamps used to fix the scanner drive cable to the No. 1 mirror mount. Figure 3-513 4) Remove the tool. 7. Adjusting the Scanner Home Position Make copies, and remove the control panel; then, check to make sure that the line of section A of the electrode mount (front of the No. 1 mirror mount) is in section B of the hole in the glass support (front).
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 8. Positioning the Scanner Locking Solenoid (SL1) • Making Adjustments 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the multifeeder assembly. 3) Adjust the stroke of the scanner locking solenoid once again so that it is as specified. E-ring Standard 8.5 ±0.5 mm (from below clamp to top of solenoid) Loosen these two screws to adjust once again. Scanner locking solenoid (SL1) Figure 3-515 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM B. Lens Drive Assembly If you turn on the power supply without removing the lens metal fixing of the lens stage or move the lens or the lens stage without disconnecting the power plug, you can damage the gear of the output shaft. q Be sure to remove the lens metal fixing of the lens stage before connecting the power plug when installing the machine. w Be sure to disconnect the power plug before moving the lens stage or the zoom lens by hand.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 4) Remove the two mounting screws e of the cable, and remove the two mounting screws r; then, lift the lens Y direction drive motor together with the support t. t r e Figure 3-517 5) Disconnect the connector y, and remove the two mounting screws u; then, detach the lens Y direction drive motor i from the support. u y i Figure 3-518 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 2. Removing the Lens Stage Temporarily 1) Remove the copyboard glass. 2) Move the No. 1 mirror mount to the left of the scanner rail. Caution: Be sure to push the center of the No. 1 mirror mount. 3) Remove the lens hood. 4) Remove the mounting screw of the Y direction cable metal clamp; then, fix the end of the Y direction cable temporarily in place. 5) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the light-blocking belt retainer w (on lens mount).
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 7) Lift the lens stage t, and detach the bushing y from the rail u. t y u Figure 3-521 3. Installing the Light-Blocking Belt Mount 1) Wind the light-blocking sheet w around the bobbin q while removing the slack; then, turn the bobbing mount e clockwise two to three times so that the boss on the bottom of the bobbin mount is in the hole of the belt mount. Set the bobbin, and fix it in place with the mounting screw t. q t w e r Figure 3-522 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 4. Removing the Lens X Direction Drive Motor 1) Remove the lens stage. 2) Disconnect the connector q, and remove the mounting screw w; then, remove the motor mount e. q w e Figure 3-523 3) Remove the two mounting screws r; then, detach the lens X direction motor t from the motor mount. t r Figure 3-524 3-36 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 5. Attaching the Lens X Direction Drive Belt Fix the lens X direction drive motor q in place with the mounting screw w when it has lowered on its own weight. q w Own weight Figure 3-525 6. Routing the Light-Blocking Belt e q w r q Light-blocking belt 1 w Light-blocking belt 2 e Light-blocking belt 3 r Light-blocking belt 4 Figure 3-526 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM 7. Replacing the Light-Blocking Belt 1) Fully wind the belt q on the bobbin in clockwise direction; then, fix it in place with tape. w q e Figure 3-527 2) Fix the light-blocking belt in place on the lens mount. 3) Turn the bobbing clockwise and counterclockwise in units of half turns; then, let it go so that the spring inside the bobbin is freed. 4) Turn the bobbin clockwise two to two-and-a-half times, and remove the tape and pull out the end of the belt.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM This chapter discusses the principles of how images are formed. It also explains the timing at which the various units involved in image formation are operated, and shows how they may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted. I. II. PROCESSES .....................................4-1 A. Controlling the Drum Surface Potential .......................................4-1 B. Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning Lamp .............................4-6 C.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM I. PROCESSES A. Controlling the Drum Surface Potential 1. Outline The machine uses an electrostatographic method, and is constructed as shown in Figure 4-101. The quality of copy images are mostly affected by the following: q Changes in the sensitivity of the drum. w Changes in the degree of charging by the primary charging assembly. e Changes in the degree of exposure.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 2. Control Method The potential sensor inside the machine measures the dark area potential (VD) and the light area potential (VL1), and the machine makes corrections based on the measurements to enable a target value. The light area potential (VL2) for developing bias is measured based on the correction conditions, and the machine uses the measurement to determine the DC component of the developing bias.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Copy Start key ON INTR Measurement by potential sensor To SCFW or AER CNTR1 VD VD VD VD Reference voltage CNTR2 VD VL1 VL1 VL1 VL1 VL1 VL2 Correction voltage Last current Scanning lamp Primary charging Reference current Correction current Last current Figure 4-102 a.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Caution: If the measurement dose not fall within the tolerance after eight tires, ‘1’ is indicated to ‘LLMT’ (upper limit flag of lamp activation voltage) in service mode (*1*; display mode). c. Controlling the Developing Bias The light area potential (VL2) for the developing bias is measured in terms of the surface potential of the drum occurring when the scanning lamp is turned on based on the last intensity adjustment signal generated during VL1 control.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Sensor cover - - + - - Electrode 2.5 mm (approx.) Chopper Figure 4-103 Sensor Cross Section Potential sensor Preamplifier circuit Chopper Electrode Piezoelectric oscillator Potential measurement PCB LED1 Sensor drive circuit DC controller PCB Drum surface potential detection circuit High-voltage generation/ adjustment circuit 1/3 transformer circuit Level shift circuit Microprocessor Figure 4-104 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM B. Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning Lamp 1. Outline Figure 4-105 shows the circuit used to control the intensity of the scanning lamp, and the circuit has the following functions: q Turning on and off the scanning lamp. w Controlling the intensity of the scanning lamp. • Keeps the intensity to a specific level in spite of changes in the power supply voltage. • Controls the intensity to suit changes in the sensitivity of the drum.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 2. Operation a. Turning On and Off the Scanning Lamp When LAON (scanning lamp activation signal) is ‘0’, the output of the differential amplification/phase control circuit goes ‘0’, and the arc circuit remains off, depriving the scanning lamp (LA1) of power. When LAON is ‘1’, on the other hand, the output of the differential amplification/phase control circuit goes ‘1’, and the arc circuit turns on, supplying the scanning lamp (LA1) with power. b.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM a. AE Mode (CMAE) on the Copier’s Side During AE rotation (AER), the scanner is moved forward for 120 mm with the scanning lamp on; the potential of the drum is then measured at four locations of the copyboard (Figure 4-107) when the scanner is moved in reverse, and the measurements are sent to the DC controller PCB. The DC controller PCB computes the average based on these surface potential measurements to determine the intensity of the scanner for copying.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM The density at the five points shown in Figure 4-109 is measured, and the results are sent to the DC controller PCB, which in turn determines the intensity of the scanning lamp during copying. (The points of measurement differ between right pick-up and left pick-up.) Figure 4-110 shows changes in the intensity of the scanning lamp in relation to the density of originals.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4. Making Checks a. Checking the Voltage at J111B-8 (LAON) Check to make sure that the voltage between J111B-8 and J111B-5 (GND) on the DC controller PCB is about 5 V when the scanner is moving forward and 0 V during initial rotation, when the scanner is moving in reverse, and during post rotation. b. Intensity/AE Adjustment Table 4-103 shows items that may be adjusted on the scanning lamp intensity control circuit.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM C. Controlling the Primary/Transfer Corona Current 1. Outline Figure 4-111 shows the circuit used to control the primary/transfer corona current, and the circuit has the following functions: q Turning on and off the primary corona current. w Controlling the primary corona current to a specific level. e Turning on and off the transfer corona. r Controlling the transfer corona current to a fixed level. 2.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM b. When the Primary Corona Current Output Is ON HVTPC is less than about 11 V. DCON is ‘1’. Variable width pulse generator circuit goes ON. Comparator circuit goes ON. Drive circuit turns on. Primary high-voltage transformer goes ON.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Transfer current (+) 3. Controlling the Transfer Corona Current How well the toner image on the drum is transferred to copy paper is affected by changes in the environment (temperature, humidity). To ensure a specific density in the presence of changes in the environment, the machine is designed to vary the transfer current level in relation to the temperature and the humidity measured by the environment sensor.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM b. When the Transfer Corona Current Output Is ON. HVTTC is less than about 11 V. DCON is ‘1’. Comparator circuit goes ON. Variable width pulse oscillator goes ON. Drive circuit goes ON. Primary high-voltage transformer goes ON. The above condition causes the high-voltage transformer to send high voltage suited to the output of the transfer charging level control signal (HVTTC) to the transfer charging assembly.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM D. Controlling the Separation/Pre-Transfer Corona Current 1. Outline Figure 4-113 shows the circuit used to control the separation corona current and the pre-transfer corona current, and the circuit has the following functions: q Turning on and off the separation/pre-transfer corona current. w Switching the separation corona current level. e Controlling the separation corona current to a specific level. r Switching the pre-transfer corona current level.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Temperature (°C) Separation current (-) Drum surface potential "high" Drum surface potential "medium" Drum surface potential "low" Figure 4-114 The transfer corona current is varied in relation to the temperature and the humidity measured by the environment sensor to eliminate the effects of changes in the environment. Pre-transfer current (-) Humidity (%) Figure 4-115 2.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3. Separation Corona Current (DC component) For the output of the separation corona current (DC component), DC current is varied to suit the voltage level (3 to 11 V) of HVSCT. Separation corona current (µA) -500 100 3 11 Voltage level (V) of HVSCT Figure 4-116 4. Pre-Transfer Corona Current (DC component) The level of the pre-transfer corona current (DC component) is varied according to the voltage level of HVP.POST.DC.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 5. Controlling the DC Component of the Separation/Pre-Transfer Corona Current If an overcurrent flows into the separation/pre-transfer charging assembly, the highvoltage stop signal (HVTOFF) is generated to temporarily stop the corona current (DC/AC component) applied to the pre-transfer/separation charging assembly.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM E. Controlling the Blanking Exposure Lamp (LED) 1. Outline The blanking exposure lamp is a LED array consisting of 134 LEDs. All 134 LEDs turns on when the blanking exposure lamp activation signal (BLKON) generated by the DC controller goes ‘0’ while the drum is rotating but the original is not exposed, potential control is not on, and AE mode is off so as to prevent adhesion of excess toner to the photosensitive drum.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM ,,,,, ,,,,, ,,,,, 7 mm (approx.) 2.75 mm 7 mm (approx.) Feeding direction 7 mm (approx.) Figure 4-118 5. Controlling the Activation in Original Frame Erase Mode LEDs are turned on to prevent adhesion of toner over widths of about 2 mm around the edges of the original for original frame erase mode. Paper size Non-image width A4 horizontal, B5 horizontal, B4, A3, LTR horizontal 2.75 ± 2.3mm Other sizes 3.0 ± 2.55mm Table 4-105 6.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7. Controlling the Activation in Hole Image Erase Mode In hole image erase mode, images of such holes as punched in the original are erased by turning on LEDs to prevent adhesion of toner along the width. The width may be adjusted between 1 and 20 mm. Feeding direction 1 to 20 mm Figure 4-120 8. Controlling the Activation in AE Mode In AE mode, the surface potential of the drum is measured so that the blank exposure LEDs would have to be turned off.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM F. Drum Heater Circuit 1. Outline The inside of the photosensitive drum is equipped with a drum heater (60 W), and the heater is controlled so that the surface of the drum remains a specific temperature. The drum heater is supplied with AC power through a power switch (SW1), door switch (SW2), and drum heater switch and by way of an AC driver.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM AC Power supply +12V DC controller PCB SW1 Power supply switch Power supply unit SW2 SW3 Drum heater switch Door switch AC driver Drum heater drive circuit J01 -5 Comparison circuit + -- Trigger circuit Triac Drum heater -6 TP3 Thermistor TH Drum heater controller PCB J01-1 Figure 4-122 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 2. Idle Rotation of the Photosensitive Drum and the Developing Cylinder In a high humidity environment, the photosensitive drum and the developing cylinder tend to absorb moisture, leading to a lowered copy density and distorted images (as when the machine is turned on for the first time in the morning).
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM G. Cleaning the Primary Charging Wire 1. Outline The machine is equipped with an automatic cleaning mechanism for the charging wire of the primary charging assembly which is executed when the following conditions are met: • The surface temperature of the fixing roller at power-on is 100°C or less. • The automatic cleaning mechanism is executed in user mode. (p. 1-17) • Last rotation (LSTR) initiated every 2,000 copies ended.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM H. Pre-Transfer/Transfer/Separation Charging Wire Automatic Cleaning Mechanism The machine is equipped with an automatic cleaning mechanism for the charging wire of the pre-transfer/transfer/separation charging assembly. The cleaning mechanism for the pre-transfer/transfer/separation charging wire is executed under the conditions and the periods set for auto cleaning for the primary charging wire.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Transfer/separation charging wire DC controller PCB Wire Transfer/separation charging wire cleaner motor drive command (TSCLM) J108A-1.19 Wire cleaner (re ar) (fro nt) Transfer/separation charging wire cleaner motor (M6) Figure 4-125 (transfer/separation charging assembly) COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM II. DRUM CLEANING ASSEMBLY/DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY A. Outline The developing assembly is operated by the drive of the main motor controlled by the developing clutch (CL8). The cleaning assembly is provided with the drive of the main motor through drum gears. The toner inside the developing assembly is monitored by the toner level detection circuit, and toner is supplied by the hopper assembly when the level falls below a specific value.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Hopper assembly Hopper motor 1 M11 Toner sensor Hopper motor 2 TS 1 Waste toner feeding screw locked detection (MSW4) Waste toner feeding screw Drum cleaning assembly M10 Developing assembly Cleaning blade TS 2 Hopper toner (toner supply) drive command (M11ON) Waste toner case Main motor Hopper motor (toner stirring) drive command (M10ON) M1 Hopper toner level signal (TEP) CL8 Developing clutch Developing assembly toner level signal (DTEP) MS 4 Developing c
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM B. Detecting the Level of Toner and Controlling the Supply Operation The toner inside the developing assembly is monitored by the toner sensor (TS2). When the toner inside the developing assembly falls below a specific level while the developing clutch (CL8) remains on during copying, the developing assembly toner level signal ( DTEP ) goes ‘0’ and is communicated to the DC controller.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM The RAM on the DC controller PCB keeps count of copies being made; when it has detected the hopper toner level detection signal ( TEP =1) for 1 sec or more, it will assume the presence of toner, thereby cleaning the counter and turning off the Add Toner message on the control panel. Reference: The inside of both the developing assembly and the hopper assembly is each equipped with a piezoelectric oscillator.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM C. Controlling the Developing Bias/Roller Electrode 1. Outline During copying, both AC bias and DC bias are applied to the developing cylinder. The DC bias is a voltage which is the sum of 100 V and VL2 measured by the potential sensor before copying is started. When the machine is not making copies, the degree of the DC bias is varied to suit the surface potential of the drum to prevent adhesion of excess toner on the photosensitive drum.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Surface Temperature of Fixing Roller 75°C or Less and Ambient Temperature 17°C or More Power switchON WMUP INTR CNTR1 CNTR2 LSTR STBY Main motor (M1) Developing clutch (CL8) DC bias AC bias , DC bias : +600V Figure 4-205 Making 2nd and Subsequent Copies 10 Min or Less after Power-On and 60 Min or Later Copy Start key ON INTR Main motor (M1) AER SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY Developing clutch (CL8) DC bias AC bias DC bias : : +600 V : Pote
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM , Making First Copy 10 Min or More after Power-On and 60 Min or Later Copy Start key ON INTR Main motor (M1) Developing clutch (CL8) DC bias AC bias CNTR1 DC bias: CNTR2 AER SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY : +600V : Potential control value (VL2 + 100 V) Figure 4-207 4-34 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3. Developing Bias Control Circuit The circuit used to control the developing bias is provided with the following functions: a. Turning on and off the AC bias b. Controlling the voltage level of the DC bias q AC Bias OFF control developing bias remote signal ACBTP is ‘0’ AC bias switch circuit goes OFF. Drive circuit goes OFF. AC transformer T401 output is cut off. The above condition deprives the developing cylinder of AC bias.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM e DC bias voltage level control The voltage of the DC bias is determined by the signal (DCBC) from the DC controller. • High-voltage DC remote signal (DCBTP) = 1 • Roller bias remote signal (ROED) = 1 • Developing DC control signal (DCBC) = 3 V or more or less than 12 V The above condition turns on the AC bias switch circuit; when the output (DCBC) from the DC controller PCB increases, the output of DC bias will also increase.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM w Turning off the roller electrode • High-voltage DC remote signal (DCBTP) is ‘0’ and roller bias signal (ROED) is ‘0’ Switch circuit goes OFF. High-voltage transformer drive circuit goes OFF. DC transformer T402 goes OFF. The above condition deprives the roller electrode of bias.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM D. Detecting the Waste Toner Feeding Screw (locking) If the waste toner pipe becomes stopped up by waste toner inside it and, as a result, the rotation of the feeding screw is hindered, waste toner can start to pour out because of feeding faults. To prevent such a problem, the machine is equipped with a feeding screw detection mechanism.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM III. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Here, the copier is discussed in terms of its mechanical characteristics and operation and how to disassemble and assemble it. Be sure to observe the following for disassembly/assembly work: 1. ! Disconnect the power plug for safety before starting disassembly/assembly work. 2. Unless otherwise noted, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them. 3. Identify the screws by type (length, diacmeter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the reflecting shade w and the support plate e. w e q q Figure 4-301 4) While pushing the electrode block at the rear toward the rear, remove the scanning lamp r. r Figure 4-302 Caution: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 4-40 Do not work if the surface of the scanning lamp is hot. Do not leave fingerprints on the surface of the scanning lamp. If the surface of the scanning lamp is soiled, dry wipe it.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 2. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Removing the Thermal Fuse Remove the copyboard glass retainer, and remove the copyboard. Remove the control panel. Remove the scanning lamp. Move the No. 1 mirror mount to the right end. Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the thermal fuse w. q w q Figure 4-303 B. Standard White Plate 1) Remove the RDF. 2) Remove the rear cover. 3) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the copyboard glass right retaining plate w.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4) Remove the two stepped screws e (M3x3), and remove the standard white cover r. e r e Figure 4-305 5) Remove the six mounting screws e, and remove the RDF mount cover r. 6) Remove the two mounting screws t, and remove the rear top cover y. e r y r e t t Figure 4-306 4-42 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7) Remove the control panel. 8) Remove the two mounting screws u, and remove the standard white plate i. u i u Figure 4-307 C. Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit 1. Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit 1) Open the front door, and slide out the hopper assembly; then, slide out the fixing/feeding unit. 2) Remove the process unit. (See p. 7-18.) 3) Remove the primary charging assembly and the pre-transfer charging assembly. 4) Remove the blanking exposure lamp assembly.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 6) Disconnect the connector q, and remove the two mounting screws w; then, remove the pre-exposure lamp unit e. q w e Figure 4-309 D. Blanking Exposure Lamp Assembly 1. Removing the Blanking Exposure Lamp Assembly 1) Open the front door, and slide out the hopper assembly. 2) Disconnect the two connectors q, and remove the mounting screw w; then, slide out the blanking exposure lamp assembly e slowly.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM E. Photosensitive Drum n Points to Note When Handling the Photosensitive Drum The machine uses an amorphous silicon drum, which will be subject to deterioration if not oriented correctly (applicable to the process unit also).
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7) Remove the two mounting screws e, and remove the front side stay r. r e e Figure 4-312 8) Holding it as shown, remove the photosensitive drum t. t Figure 4-313 Caution: Remove the photosensitive drum while taking care not to damage it. You need not remove the bearing at the rear and the gear at the front of the photosensitive drum. 4-46 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 2. Replacing the Drum Heater 1) Remove the photosensitive drum from the process unit. 2) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the flange w at the front. w q Figure 4-314 Caution: Whenever you have removed the photosensitive drum, wrap it with six or more sheets of copy paper (A3/11"×17") or the drum protection sheet (stored near the waste toner case) to protect it from soiling and damage.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM F. Potential Sensor Assembly 1. Removing the Potential Sensor Assembly 1) Remove the blanking potential lamp assembly from the copier. (See p. 4-44.) Caution: Keep in mind that the potential sensor assembly is an integrated part of the blanking exposure lamp assembly. G. Primary Charging Assembly 1. Removing the Primary Charging Assembly 1) Open the front door, and open the hopper assembly.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM H. Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly 1. Removing the Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly 1) Open the front door, and slide out the hopper assembly. 2) Remove the mounting screw q, and disconnect the connector w; then, remove the pre-transfer charging assembly e. q e w Figure 4-316 Caution: After installing the pre-transfer charging assembly, execute ‘wire cleaning’ in user mode.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4) Disconnect the connector e, and slide out the transfer/separation charging assembly r to the front; then, remove it by lifting it toward the left. r e B A Figure 4-318 4-50 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 2. Installing the Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly Install the transfer/separation charging assembly by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in mind: 1) Be sure to fit the four bosses q of the transfer/separation charging assembly in the cut-off w of the frame of the fixing/feeding unit.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3) Be sure to use the mounting screw t when fixing the fixing guide plate r in place. t r Figure 4-322 4) Be sure to execute ‘wire cleaning’ in user mode. (You need not perform this step if the surface temperature of the upper fixing roller is 100°C or less, since wire cleaning will be executed automatically.) 4-52 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM J. Charging Wire 1. Outline The photosensitive drum is surrounded by three charging wires: primary, pretransfer, transfer/separation, each of which is 0.06 mm in diameter. 2. Removing the Wire Cleaner of the Primary Charging Assembly 1) Pick the wire cleaner with fingers, and disengage the hook with a screwdriver. Figure 4-323 3.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 2) Remove the wire cleaner. Caution: For other charging assemblies, remove the two lids. 3) Free a length (about 5 cm) of wire from the charging reel, and form a loop at one end (2 mm dia.). Reference: When forming a loop, you may wind the charging wire around a hex key once; then, turn the key three to four times, and twist the wire. 4) Cut the end (excess) of the twisted wire with a nipper. 5) Hook the loop on the stud.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7) Cut the excess charging wire with a nipper. 8) Pick the end of the charging wire tensioning spring with tweezers, and hook it on the charging electrode. In the case of the transfer charging assembly, hook it on the pin at the front. Figure 4-327 Caution: After stringing the wire, check to make sure that • It is not bent or twisted in the middle and its gold plating has not peeled. • It is in the V-groove of the charging wire positioner.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 11) Install the wire cleaner. (At this time, be sure that the cleaner is oriented correctly.) 12) Clean the charging wire with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. 4. Stringing the Grid Wire of the Primary Charging Assembly 1) Loosen the two mounting screws used to keep the left and the right shielding plates in place. 2) Loosen the three mounting screws used to keep the motor unit at the front in place.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Reference: To form a loop, wind the wiring wire around a hex key once; then, turn the hex key three to four times, and twist the wire. 5) Cut the twisted charging wire (excess) with a nipper. 6) Hook the loop on the stud A shown in Figure 4-331.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 5. Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire Height of charging wire Charging assembly Tolerance Primary ± 1mm 7.5 +1.5 - 0 mm 7.5 +1.5 -0 mm A No mechanism Pre-transfer 9.5 +1.0 - 0 mm B Transfer 10.2±0.5mm ± 2mm C Separation ± 2mm 16.2±0.5 14.9±0.5 mm mm D Figure 4-332 Reference: The height (position) of the primary and the transfer charging wires may be adjusted by turning the screw behind the charging assembly.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 6. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Anti-Stray Sheet Open the front door. Remove the developing assembly. Remove the hopper assembly. Remove the process unit. (See p. 7-18.) Remove the two screws q, and remove the blanking exposure rail stay w. w q q Figure 4-333 6) Clean the primary charging assembly anti-stray sheet e. e Figure 4-334 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM K. Developing Assembly Caution: The machine’s developing assembly is not equipped with a developing cylinder protection cover, requiring you to take care whenever you have removed the developing assembly. If the developing assembly is not set inside the copier, be sure not to install the developing assembly locking assembly.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 2. Removing the Blade Unit 1) Remove the developing assembly from the copier. 2) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the developing assembly cover w. w q q Figure 4-337 3) Place a newspaper on the floor or a desk, and empty the developing assembly of toner. 4) Remove the two mounting screws e, and remove the blade unit r together with the mounting plate. e r e Figure 4-338 Caution: The blade must be installed to a very high precision.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4. 1) 2) 3) Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Magnetic Seal Remove the developing assembly from the copier. Remove the blade unit. Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the gear unit together with the gear unit w. q w q Figure 4-339 Caution: Exercise care, as the gear engaged with the screw becomes free when the gear unit is removed.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 5) Remove the two mounting screws u, and remove the electrode plate. u i Figure 4-341 6) Remove the mounting screw o, and remove the polarity positioning plate !0. o !0 Figure 4-342 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7) Remove the grip ring !1 mounted to the cylinder shaft at the front, and remove the butting roll !2. !1 !2 Figure 4-343 8) Remove the two mounting screws !3, and remove the blade !4 together with the mounting plate. !3 !4 !3 Figure 4-344 9) Remove the bearing !5 at the front and the rear, and remove the developing cylinder !6. !5 !6 !5 Figure 4-345 Caution: Do not leave fingerprints or oils on the surface of the developing cylinder.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 5. Cleaning the Developing Assembly Anti-Stray Sheet 1) Remove the developing assembly, and clean the developing assembly anti-stray sheet q. q Figure 4-346 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM L. Hopper Assembly 1. 1) 2) 3) Removing the Hopper Assembly from the Copier Remove the developing assembly from the copier. (See p. 4-60.) Slide out the hopper assembly to the front. (See p. 7-18.) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the hopper assembly w. q w Figure 4-347 4-66 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM M. Drum Cleaner 1. Construction Cleaning blade Separation claw Figure 4-348 2. 1) 2) 3) Removing the Cleaning Blade Slide out the process unit from the copier. (See p. 7-18.) Disconnect the connector q on the AC line of the drum heater. Remove the four mounting screws w, and remove the cleaning blade assembly e. w e w q Figure 4-349 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4) Remove the E-ring r, and remove the pressure spring t. r t Figure 4-350 5) Loosen the five mounting screws y, and remove the cleaning blade from the blade support plate. y Figure 4-351 3. Installing the Cleaning Blade Install the cleaning blade by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in mind: 1) Butt the cleaning blade q against the rear. No gap. q Blade retaining plate Figure 4-352 4-68 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 2) Lightly tighten the five mounting screws w and stop turning them when resistance is felt, thereby fixing the cleaning blade in place temporarily. 3) Turn the screws fully (20° to 30°) in the order shown in Figure 4-353. w t e w q r Order of tightening Figure 4-353 Caution: After installing the cleaning blade, check to make sure that the edge of the blade is not appreciably wavy.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 5. Cleaning the Cleaner Side Scraper Clean the cleaner side scraper when replacing the cleaning blade (every 500,000 copies). 1) Remove the cleaning blade. 2) Remove any paper lint collecting at the tip of the side scraper (gap A between magnet roller and toner guide roller) with tweezers. 3) Remove the toner collecting on the surface of the magnetic roller. (Scoop up with copy paper shaped in the form of the letter U.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4) Turn the magnet roller clockwise (viewing from the front). 5) When a full coating has developed in the area from which toner was removed in step 3), repeat steps 3) through 5). N. Separation Claw/Separation Claw Drive Assembly 1. Removing from the Drum Unit 1) Remove the process unit from the copier. (See p. 7-18.) Caution: 1. Take care not to bend the separation claw. 2. Take care not to damage the photosensitive drum. 2) Remove the screw q, and remove the No.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM O. Waste Toner Feeding Assembly 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Slide out the process unit and the fixing/feeding unit from the copier. (See p. 7-18.) Remove the rear cover. Remove the cleaner fan and the feeding fan. (See p. 7-32.) Remove the high-voltage transformer PCB. Remove the waste toner drive assembly together with the waste toner feeding assembly. 6) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the waste toner feeding screw detection circuit w.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM This chapter explains the principles used from when copy paper is picked up to when a copy is delivered in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation to their timing of operation. It also shows how these units may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted. I. II. III. IV. V. VI. PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM ............5-1 A. Outline ...........................................5-1 CASSETTE PICK-UP .........................5-4 A. Pick-Up Operation ...
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM I. PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM A. Outline The machine uses a center reference method, in which paper is moved along the center of the pick-up/feeding path with the aim of improving pick-up/feeding performance. The pick-up system consists of the front paper deck, cassettes, and multifeeder assembly; in addition, the system includes the holding tray assembly and the holding tray feeding assembly for making two-sided/overlay copies.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM As many as 17 sensors in total are used to monitor the movement of copy paper; see Figure 5-101 for arrangement.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM Registration roller Delivery paper deflecting plate Delivery Fixing assembly assembly PS47 PS10 Multifeeder Photosensitive drum PS22 PS23 Feeding assembly PS52 Copy tray PS12 PS15 Holding try assembly Holding try feeding assembly PS14 PS8 PS17 PS9 PS39 PS34 PS35 PS33 PS24 PS37PS31 PS32 PS49 PS36 Left deck Right deck PS27 PS25PS26 Cassette 3 PS30 PS28 PS29 Cassette 4 Figure 5-101 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM II. CASSETTE PICK-UP A. Pick-Up Operation Figure 5-201 is a diagram showing the cassette pick-up control system.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 1. Outline The copy paper inside the cassette is held up by a lifter so that it remains in contact with the pick-up roller. When the pick-up clutch (CL10/CL12) turns on, the pick-up roller starts to rotate to feed copy paper. Thereafter, the pick-up roller releasing solenoid (SL11/SL12) turns on and, as a result, the pick-up roller moves away from the surface of the paper.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM B. Cassette Lifter Operation When the cassette is slid into the copier, pick-up roller moves down, and the lightblocking plate moves away from the lifter position sensor (PS31, PS34, PS25, PS28), turning on the lifter motor (M14, M15) and moving the lifter to move up. The lifter motor stops where the lifter position sensor (PS25, PS28) can detect the top surface of the stack of copy paper on the lifter.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM Pick-up motor M2 Pick-up roller Feeding rollers Copy paper Separation roller Lifter position lever Lifter position sensor/ (PS25/PS28) Paper sensor/ (PS26/PS29) Pick-up roller Paper detecting lever Lifter Cassette open/ closed sensor (PS50/PS51) M (M14/M15) Figure 5-205 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM C. Identifying the Size of Copy Paper in the Cassette 1. Outline The size of the copy paper inside the cassette is identified by the paper size sensor mounted to the rear of the cassette holder. When the cassette is slid into the cassette holder, the paper size sensor is pushed by the boss on the cassette and turns on, thereby enabling identification of the width and the length of the copy paper.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM Width guide (rear) Paper width detecting VR Width guide (front) Paper length sensor unit Cassette Length guide Figure 5-207 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 3. Markings on the Width Guide Rail The width guide rail found inside the cassette has paper size reference holes which are identified by markings (A through M) as shown in Table 5-201. Refer to the markings when skew pick-up occurs (as reported by the user) to determine whether the correct paper width is set. (This information is not disclosed to the user.) Markings A B C D E F G H I J K L M Paper STMT-R A5-R B5-R KLGL-R GLTR-R G-LGL A4-R LGL/LTR-R FLSC B4/B5 G-LTR 279.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 4. Paper Size The microprocessor on the DC controller PCB identifies the size of paper with reference to inputs of paper length and according to the data shown in Table 5-202. The paper sizes in Table 5-203 are specified in service mode selected in relation to each group. (The asterisk indicates the paper size specified at time of shipment.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM • Papers Used for the Machine Paper Notation Size (vertical x horizontal in mm) A3 A3 (297±1) × (420±1) A4R A4R (210±1) × (297±1) A4 A4 (297±1) × (210±1) A5 A5 (210±1) × (148.5±1) A5R A5R (148.5±1) × (210±1) B4 B4 (257±1) × (364±1) B5R B5R (182±1) × (257±1) B5 B5 (257±1) × (182±1) 11" × 17" 11 × 17 (279±1) × (432±1) LETTER-R LTRR (216±1) × (297±1) LETTER LTR (297±1) × (216±1) STATEMENT STMT (216±1) × (139.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM III. FRONT PAPER DECK ASSEMBLY A. Outline The paper deck controls the operation of each load according to the signals from the DC controller PCB to execute pick-up/feeding operation. The loads related to pick-up/feeding and lifter are driven by the pick-up motor. The service person is expected to register the new deck paper size in service mode whenever the deck size has been changed.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 1. Pick-Up Operation The copy paper inside the deck is held up by a lifter so that it remains in contact with the pick-up roller. When the deck pick-up clutch (CL14/CL16) turns on, the pick-up roller starts to rotate to feed copy paper. Thereafter, the deck pick-up roller releasing solenoid (SL4/SL5) turns on so that the pick-up roller moves away from the surface of the paper.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2. Sequence of Pick-Up Operations a. Right Deck, A4, 2 Copies Copy Start key ON INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY Pick-up motor (M2) Right deck pick-up clutch (CL14) Right deck pick-up roller releasing solenoid (SL4) Vertical path roller 0 paper sensor (PS24) Vertical path roller 1 paper sensor (PS33) Vertical path roller 1 drive clutch (CL15) Figure 5-302 b.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM B. Lifter Operation 1. Operation When the deck is slid into the pedestal, the deck open/closed sensor (PS38/PS40) turns on and, at the same time, the pick-up roller moves down and the light-blocking plate moves away from the deck lifter position sensor (PS31/PS34). This condition turns on the lifter drive motor (M18/M19), and lets the drive of the pick-up motor (M2) to the take-up shaft; the lifter then starts to move up.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM Lifter position sensor (PS31/PS34) Lifter detecting lever Pick-up roller Feeding roller Separation roller Copy paper Lifter Deck : Pick-up roller moves up; the light-blocking plate of the lifter detecting lever lowers to block the lifter position sensor (PS31/PS34). : Pick-up roller moves down; the light-blocking plate of the lifter detecting lever rises to leave away from the lifter position sensor (PS31/PS34). Figure 5-305 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2. Deck Limit Detection When the lifter reaches the lifter position sensor (PS31/PS34), the deck lifter position signal is sent to the microprocessor on the DC controller, causing the microprocessor to stop the deck lifter drive motor (M18/M19). The deck limit sensor (PS37/PS39) is provided in consideration of such cases as when the motor fails to stop for some reason.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM C. Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper in the Deck 1. Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper in the Deck The presence/absence of paper inside the deck is detected as follows by the deck paper sensor (PS32/PS35). When the deck runs out of paper, the paper detecting lever leaves the paper sensor (PS32/PS35), causing the DC controller PCB to assume the absence of paper.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM IV. MULTIFEEDER A. Pick-Up Operation The presence/absence of paper in the multifeeder is detected by the multifeeder paper sensor (PS22). When the multifeeder is selected as the source of paper and the Copy Start key is pressed with paper in the multifeeder, the multifeeder pick-up clutch (CL7) and multifeeder pick-up relay solenoid (SL15) turn on to rotate the pick-up roller, feeding roller, separation roller, and holding roller.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM B. Identifying the Size of Paper in the Multifeeder When the user adjusts the slide guide of the multifeeder, the output of the variable resistor operating in conjunction with the slide guide is sent to the DC controller PCB, enabling the detection of the width of the copy paper. The data on the width of the copy paper is used to determine how to control the lens and the blanking exposure mechanisms.
&'() CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM C.
!" !"/0 ()&' CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM V. CONTROLLING THE REGISTRATION CLUTCH The registration clutch controls copy paper so that it matches the image on the photosensitive drum at a specific position. In non-binding mode, the registration clutch exerts control so that the leading edge of copy paper matches the leading edge of the image. In binding mode, control will be as shown in Figure 5-501 so as to create a leading edge width on copies.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM VI. MAKING TWO-SIDED/OVERLAY COPIES A. Making Two-Sided/Overlay Copies (1st side) When copying on the first side in two-sided/overlay mode, the delivery deflecting plate is shifted by the delivery paper deflecting solenoid (SL2) to a special feeding path. The paper deflecting plate shifts up when the registration clutch (CL9) turns on. After copying on the first side, the holding tray inlet roller (clockwise) feeds the copy paper to the holding tray.
'( $%+,# CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 1.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM B. Making Two-Sided Copies (2nd side) When copying on the second side of a two-sided copy, pick-up occurs on the holding tray. When the Copy Start key is pressed, the bottommost sheet of the stack of copy paper on the holding tray is moved to the holding tray registration roller as the holding tray separation clutch (CL6) and the holding tray re-pick up roller solenoid (SL6) turn on in response to the movement of the sheet.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 1.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM C. Making Overlay Copies (2nd side) 1. Outline The feeding path for copying on the second side of an overlay copy is formed when the holding tray paper deflecting plate is shifted up by the holding tray paper deflecting plate solenoid (SL8). When copying on the second side, pick-up occurs on the holding tray. The bottommost sheet is picked up and sent to the holding tray inlet; then, the copy paper is switched back, and forwarded to the holding tray registration roller.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2. Outline of Operation q After pick-up, the copy paper is moved upward by the holding tray paper deflecting plate. Holding tray paper deflecting plate PS14 Figure 5-606 w As soon as the trailing edge of the copy paper leaves the holding tray paper deflecting plate, the holding tray forward clutch (CL5) turns off to stop the copy paper. Figure 5-607 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM e The holding tray reversing clutch (CL4) turns on, and the copy paper is reversed and forwarded to the holding tray registration roller. Holding tray registration roller Figure 5-608 r After reaching the holding tray registration roller, the copy paper is moved to the registration roller through the holding tray feeding assembly. ly emb ss ng a i ray ng t feed i PS14 To hold Figure 5-609 5-30 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 3.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM D. Reversal Delivery The feeding path for reversed delivery is formed when the delivery deflecting plate is shifted up by the delivery deflecting plate solenoid (SL2). The delivery deflecting plate shifts up as soon as the registration clutch (CL9) turns on, thereby moving the copy paper in the direction of the holding tray.
, , CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 1.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM E. Switching the Paper Size for Two-Sided/Overlay/Reversal Delivery Copies 1. Movement of the Paper Size Guide When the Copy Start key is pressed in two-sided/overlay/reversal delivery mode, the holding tray (X, Y) motor (M8, M9) starts to rotate clockwise, and the paper size guide plate moves in the direction of the arrow. The motor (M8, M9) stops when the light-blocking plate of the paper size guide plate blocks the holding tray (X, Y) home position sensor (PS21, PS20).
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2. Movement of the Paper Jogging Plate and the Trailing Edge Guide Plate When copy paper arrives at the holding tray assembly, the paper jogging plate (X direction) and the trailing edge guide plate (Y direction) operate to put the sheets in order.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 3. Detecting the Presence/Absence of Copy Paper The presence of copy paper on the holding tray is checked for re-pick up operation. When sheets have been stacked on the holding tray, the re-circulating lever is placed on the topmost sheet of the stack by operating the holding tray re-circulating motor (M7). When the last sheet has been picked up, the re-circulating lever falls down to the holding tray.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM F. Re-Pick Up from the Holding Tray Pick-up/separation takes place when the Copy Start key is pressed for copying on the second side.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM G. Skipping Operation 1. Outline In skipping mode, every other original is skipped when making two-sided copies of one-sided originals with the aim of making full use of the space that occurs in the paper path in the holding tray assembly and the holding tray feeding assembly (space not covered by paper).
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2. Outline of Operations The sequence of operation is as follows: a. Making 2 Copies of 4 Originals 4th original, 2nd, 4th, 3rd, 2nd, 1st, 3rd, 1st original b. Making 2 Copies of 5 Originals 5th original, 3rd, 1st, 5th, 4th, 3rd, 2nd, 1st, 4th, 2nd original c. Making 1 Copy of 4 Originals 4th original, 2nd, 3rd, 1st original d. Making 1 Copy of 5 Originals 5th original, 3rd, 1st, 4th, 2nd original Reference: Skipping mode may be disabled in user mode.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 5-40 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
3. Skipping Operation (odd number of originals) 1 2 3 4 3 4 Originals 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 RDF Drum 4 3 3 4 1 2 Scanner 2 Holding tray 1) The Copy Start key is pressed. (The originals move as in right pick-up operation of the RDF.) 4 4 4 2) The 4th original is picked up. 3) The 4th original is copied.
4. Skipping Operation (odd number of originals) 1 2 3 4 5 Originals 1 2 3 1 2 3 RDF 4 5 1 4 5 4 5 1 4 5 2 3 3 2 Drum Fixing roller Holding tray 5 Registration roller 5 3 5 1) The Copy Start key is on. (The movement of originals 2) The 5th original is picked up. is as in right pick-up of the RFD.) 1 2 3 5 1 2 3 5 1 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 4 5 5 5 W W 5 1 3 4 5 5 3 5) The 3rd original is copied.
3 4 4 3 5 1 3 5 2 1 2 3 5 1 3 5 W 2 4 W 4 W 2 4 W 1 1 21) The 4th original is copied on the back of the 3rd copy sheet picked up from the holding tray (2nd copy), and the 22) The 2nd original is picked up. copy sheet is moved through the delivery assembly, reversed, and discharged. The 3rd original is not copied (skipped), but is returned to the original tray of the RDF.
Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.com 5-44 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 5. Reversal Delivery Reversal delivery is executed when making copies of an odd number of originals in skipping mode and when reversal delivery is selected. In this mode, each copy is turned over upon delivery so that the stack will be collated when on the copy tray. a. If copies are made of an odd number of originals in reversal delivery and skipping modes, they will be stacked as shown in Figure 5-623a. 1 3 2 Figure 5-623a b.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM VII. DETECTING JAMS A. Outline As many as 17 sensors are arrange as shown in Figure 5-701 to monitor the movement of copy paper. The microprocessor reads in the signals coming from each of the sensors at such times as programmed to identify the presence of a jam. When it finds a jam, it causes all sheets moving ahead of the jam to be discharged, and stops the machine. The control panel will offer instructions on how to remove jams after the suspension of operation.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM Name Type of jam PS24 Pick-up vertical 0 paper sensor Delay/stationary jams. Delay/stationa ry jams. PS27 Pick-up vertical path 3 paper sensor Delay/stationary jams. External delivery sensor Delay/stationa ry jams. PS30 Pick-up vertical path 4 paper sensor Delay/stationary jams. PS12 Internal delivery sensor (reversing assembly) Stationary jams. PS33 Pick-up vertical path 1 paper sensor Delay/stationary jams.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2. Pick-up vertical path feeding delay jam identified by the pick-up vertical path 1 paper sensor (PS33) 3. Pick-up vertical path feeding delay jam identified by the pick-up vertical path 0 paper sensor (PS24) 4. Pick-up vertical path feeding delay jam identified by the pick-up vertical path 2 paper sensor (PS36) 5. Pick-up vertical path feeding delay jam identified by the pick-up vertical path 3 paper sensor (PS27) 6.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 1. Registration Roller Delay Jam Copy Start key ON Jam indicator ON INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV 0.4 sec Multifeeder pick-up clutch (CL7) Pick-up vertical path 1 sensor (PS33) 0.7 sec Pick-up vertical path 0 sensor (PS24) 0.9 sec Pick-up vertical path 2 sensor (PS36) 1.4 sec Pick-up vertical path 3 sensor (PS27) 1.7 sec Pick-up vertical path 4 sensor (PS30) 2.1 sec Left deck pick-up sensor (PS49) 1.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 3. Pick-Up Vertical Path Feeding 0/1 Delay Jam Copy Start key ON Jam indicator SCFW PKUPR SCRV SCFW Right deck/cassette 1 pick-up clutch (CL14) Jam check Pick-up vertical path 0 paper sensor (PS24) Pick-up vertical path 1 paper sensor (PS33) Normal Error Pick-up motor (M2) Figure 5-704 4.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 5. Pick-Up Vertical Path Feeding 2 through 4 Delay Jam Copy Start key ON PKUPR Jam indicator SCFW SCFW SCRV Left deck pick-up clutch (CL16) Jam check Pick-up vertical path 2 paper sensor (PS36) Pick-up vertical path 3 paper sensor (PS27) Pick-up vertical path 4 paper sensor (PS30) Normal Error Pick-up motor (M2) Figure 5-706 6.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 7. Fixing Assembly Outlet Delay Jam Jam indicator SCFW SCRV SCFW LSTR SCRV Registration paper sensor (PS23) 1.1 sec Jam check Fixing assembly outlet paper sensor (PS47) Error Normal Main motor (M1) Figure 5-708 8. Fixing Assembly Outlet Stationary Jam Jam indicator SCFW SCRV SCFW LSTR SCRV Fixing assembly outlet delay jam check I Jam check Fixing assembly outlet paper sensor (PS47) Normal Error Main motor I: Varies according to paper length.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 9. External Delivery Delay Jam Jam indicator SCFW SCRV LSTR Fixing assembly outlet paper sensor (PS47) I Jam check External delivery paper sensor (PS10) Error Normal Main motor (M1) I : For normal delivery, about 0.25 sec. : For reversal delivery, varies according to paper length. Figure 5-710 10.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 11. Internal Delivery Delay Jam Jam indicator SCFW SCRV LSTR Fixing assembly outlet paper sensor (PS47) 0.2 sec Jam check Internal delivery sensor (PS12) Error Normal Pick-up motor (M2) Figure 5-712 12. Internal Delivery Stationary Jam Jam indicator SCFW SCRV LSTR Internal delivery delay jam check I Jam check Internal delivery sensor (PS12) Normal Error Pick-up motor (M2) I: Varies according to paper length. Figure 5-713 5-54 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 13. Holding Tray Inlet Delay Jam Jam indicator SCFW LSTR Internal delivery sensor (PS12) 0.2 sec Jam check Holding tray inlet sensor (PS15) Error Normal Pick-up motor (M2) Figure 5-714 14. Holding Tray Inlet Stationary Jam Jam indicator SCFW LSTR Holding tray inlet delay jam check I Jam check Holding tray inlet sensor (PS15) Normal Error Pick-up motor (M2) I: Varies according to paper length. Figure 5-715 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 15. Holding Tray Re-Pick Up Delay Jam Copy Start key ON INTR Jam indicator SCFW SCRV SCFW Holding tray separation clutch (CL6) Jam check Holding tray pick-up sensor (PS17) Error Normal Pick-up motor (M2) Figure 5-716 16.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 17. Holding Tray Registration Stationary Jam Jam indicator ON Copy Start key ON INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV Holding tray registration delay jam check I Jam check Holding tray registration paper sensor (PS14) Error Normal Pick-up motor (M2) I: Varies according to paper length. Figure 5-718 18.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 19. Holding Tray Feeding 1/2 Stationary Jam Jam indicator ON Copy Start key ON INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW Holding tray feeding 1/2 delay jam I Jam check Holding tray feeding assembly 2 paper sensor (PS9) Normal Error Holding tray feeding assembly 1 paper sensor (PS8) Pick-up motor (M2) I: Varies according to paper length. Figure 5-720 20.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 21. Left Deck Pick-Up Stationary Jam Copy Start key ON Jam indicator ON PKUPR SCFW SCRV SCFW Left deck pick-up delay jam check I Jam check Left deck outlet paper sensor (PS49) Pick-up motor (M2) I: Varies according to paper length. Figure 5-722 22. Fixing Separation Claw Assembly Stationary Jam Jam indicator SCFW SCRV LSTR Fixing assembly outlet paper sensor (PS47) 0.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM VIII. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Here, the copier is discussed in terms of its mechanical characteristics and operation and how to disassemble and assemble it. Be sure to observe the following for disassembly/assembly work: 1. ! Disconnect the power plug for safety before starting disassembly/assembly work. 2. Unless otherwise noted, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them. 3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM A. Multifeeder Assembly 1. Removing the Multifeeder Assembly 1) Remove the right cover and the upper right cover, and disconnect the two connectors q. q Figure 5-801 2) Open the multifeeder assembly, and pull on the grip to open the multifeeder door. Remove the door tape, and lift the multifeeder assembly to detach it from the hinge. 2. Removing the Pick-Up Roller 1) Open the multifeeder paper guide.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM Caution: If you used the multifeeder (manual feeding) during machine installation or after a long period of not using it, pick-up may fail. If such is the case, peel the protection sheet from the sponge roller, and dry wipe the surface of the sponge roller. 3. Installing the Pick-Up Roller Install the pick-up roller by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in mind: • The pick-up roller used at the front and that used at the rear are NOT interchangeable.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM • The collar on the pick-up roller to be used at the rear is gold in color. When installing the pick-up roller r to the pick-up assembly, be sure to orient it so that the round marking t on the side of the roller and the round marking y on the collar (gold) are toward the rear. y t Direction of rotation r (rear) Collar (gold) r Pick-up roller t Marking (roller) y Marking (collar) Figure 5-803a 4. Removing the Separation Roller 1) Remove the multifeeder assembly.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 3) Remove the spring e at the front and the rear, and remove the mounting screw r at the front; then, pull out the positioning pin t, and remove the registration lower roller assembly y. y e r t Figure 5-805 4) Remove the two mounting screws u, and remove the separation roller support plate i. 5) Remove the joint, and remove the separation roller o. Caution: Take care when removing the separation roller, as the bushing at the front becomes disengaged.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM Caution: The urethane sponge used on the roller is initially pink and changes to yellow over time, accelerated by exposure to light (pink to orange, and then to yellow). The fact is common to all urethane sponge types, and will not affect its physical performance. Keep in mind that color difference, if any, does not indicate different part types. Urethane sponge Figure 5-806a 5. 1) 2) 3) 4) Removing the Feeding Roller Remove the multifeeder assembly.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 6. Removing the Multifeeder Paper Sensor 1) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the solenoid cover w. Remove the mounting screw e, and remove the solenoid r together with the support plate. r e q w Figure 5-808 2) Remove the two mounting screws t, and remove the grip y. y t Figure 5-809 5-66 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 3) Remove the ten mounting screws u, and remove the door sensor metal fixing i and the multifeeder cover o. i u u u o u Figure 5-810 4) Remove the two mounting screws !0, and remove the lower cover !1. !1 !0 Figure 5-811 5) Remove the two mounting screws !2, and remove the guide plate !3. !2 !3 Figure 5-812 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 6) Remove the two mounting screws !4, and remove the sensor mount !5. 7) Detach the sensor from the sensor mount. !5 !4 Figure 5-813 7. Attaching the Side Guide Timing Belt in the Multifeeder Assembly Force the rack plate of the multifeeder against section A (open state). Move the slide volume in the direction of B, and attach the timing belt to the pulley. Timing belt Pulley Rack plate Pulley Section A B Side volume Figure 5-814 5-68 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 8. Installing the Feeding Roller of the Multifeeder When installing the pick-up roller q to the multifeeder pick-up assembly, be sure to orient it so that the markings “5” e and the belt pulley face the front. e 5 5 w q (front) q Pick-up roller w Belt pulley e Markings (roller) Figure 5-815 9.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 10. Position of the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid of the Multifeeder Slide the solenoid in the direction of A to adjust so that the gap between the shutter q and the shutter plate w when the solenoid is pulled is 0.4 ±0.2 mm. A q w 0.4±0.2mm 0.4±0.2mm Figure 5-817 Figure 5-818 5-70 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM B. Front Paper Deck Assembly 1. Removing the Paper Deck Assembly from the Copier 1) Remove the left/right stopper q to the paper deck, and remove the paper deck. q Figure 5-820 (left of right deck) q Figure 5-820a (right of right deck) COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2. Removing the Lifter Cable 1) Remove the paper deck. 2) Remove the two mounting screws q above, and loosen the two mounting screws w on the side; then, remove the deck front cover e. 3) Remove the two mounting screws r inside the deck, and remove the front and rear guide plates t. t w q r e w Figure 5-821 4) Mark the position of the latch assembly; then, remove the left and right mounting screws y (7 in total), and remove the latch assembly u.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM u y i y Figure 5-822b (right) 6) Remove the mounting screw o at the front, and free the oil damper plate !0. o !0 Figure 5-823 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 7) Remove the E-ring !1 at the front; then, while sliding out the gear and the pulley cover toward the front, detach the end of the cable !2 from the pulley. !2 !1 Figure 5-824 8) While holding the rear gear and the spring in place, remove the E-ring !3; then, while sliding out the pulley cover toward the front, detach the cable !5 from the pulley cover !4. 9) Detach the end of the cable from the pulley. !4 !5 !3 Figure 5-825 5-74 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 10) Remove the mounting screw !6 from the cable relay assembly at the front, and remove the stop !7. !7 !6 Figure 5-826 11) Remove the mounting screw !8 from the cable relay assembly at the rear and remove the stop !9. !8 !9 Figure 5-827 12) Remove the two mounting screws @0, and remove the grip assembly @1. @0 @1 Figure 5-828 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 13) Remove the mounting screw @2, and remove the cable together with the mounting plate @3. @2 @3 Figure 5-829 (front) @3 @2 Figure 5-829a (rear) Caution: If not done with care when setting the left compartment, the locking assembly of the grip and the fixing assembly of the machine will interfere with each other, loosening the fixing screw on the hook fixing plate and, ultimately, deforming the hook fixing plate.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM Hook fixing plate Top plate (left) Figure 5-829b 3. Changing the Deck Paper Size The deck paper size is changed by changing the position of the front, rear, and rear left guide plates. Reference: At time of shipment, the deck paper size is set to A4; if the user wants a non-A4 size, change the size; otherwise, skip the steps that follow. (You need, however, to attach the A4 size label.) 1) Slide out the deck to the front until it stops.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM B5 LTR A4 AL LTR B5 3) While referring to the size markings on the deck base plate, front side plate, and guide plates, install the front, rear, and rear left guide plates w. LTR A4 B5 Figure 5-831 Caution: Make sure of the following about the front and rear guide plates: • They are perpendicular to the base of the deck. • They are parallel to the metal plates on the deck front and rear. 4) Place copy paper in the deck, and slide the deck in the machine.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 4. Adjusting the Deck Registration Remove the deck front cover, and loosen the two mounting screws q on the left and the right of the deck; then, shift the latch assembly w to the front and rear until the position is as indicated in Figure 5-833. w q Figure 5-832a (left) w q Figure 5-832b (right) 0±1.5mm 0 2 4 6 8 10 Figure 5-833 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM C. Right Deck Pick-Up Assembly (cassette holder) 1. Removing the Pick-Up Assembly from the Copier 1) Slide out the paper deck and the cassette of the pick-up assembly which you want to remove from the copier. 2) Open the upper right door and the lower right door. Caution: The pick-up assembly cannot be removed if you try to remove it without first removing the paper deck and the cassette because of the lifter.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM n Orientation of the Pick-Up Roller Install the pick-up roller by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in mind: • The pick-up roller used at the front and the rear are NOT interchangeable. • The collar of the pick-up roller at the front is gold in color. When installing the pick-up roller q to the pick-up assembly, make sure that the round marking w on the side of the roller and the round marking e on the collar (gold) face the front of the machine.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 3. 1) 2) 3) 4) Removing the Feeding Roller Remove the pick-up assembly from the copier. Remove the screw w, and remove the feeding roller cover q. Remove the stop ring e from the front of the feeding roller. Remove the stop ring r and the pick-up roller t at the front; then, remove the feeding roller u together with the timing belt y. u e q w r y t Figure 5-837 4.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2) Remove the two mounting screws r, and detach the separation roller assembly t from the joint. t r Figure 5-839 3) Remove the separation roller y from the separation roller shaft mount. Caution: Take care not to lose the pin on the roller. y Figure 5-840 Caution: The urethane sponge used on the roller is initially pink and changes to yellow over time, accelerated by exposure to light (pink to orange, and then to yellow).
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 5. Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation Roller If double feeding or pick-up failure occurs during pick-up, adjust the position of the pressure spring of the separation roller. • If double feeding occurs, move the spring in the direction of B. • If pick-up failure occurs, move the spring in the direction of A. q w A e B r q Feeding roller w Separation roller e Pressure lever r Pressure spring Figure 5-841 5-84 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 6. Orientation of the Separation Roller Pay attention to the orientation of the separation roller whenever you are replacing it. Wider groove Narrower groove (rear) (front) Figure 5-842 Caution: If the separation roller is installed in the wrong orientation, interference with the clamping washer can cause problems. COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 7. Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Cassette/Deck Pick-Up Assembly When installing the feeding roller assembly q to the cassette/deck pick-up assembly, make sure that the belt pulley w is toward the front of the copier. When installing the feeding roller e to the feeding roller shaft r, make sure that the marking “5” t faces the front of the copier.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 9. Positioning the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid of the Cassette As shown in Figure 5-845, adjust the position of the solenoid so that the distance from the bottom of the pick-up assembly and the section A of the roller arm is 36 ±0.5 mm. (Use two screws q.) 36±0.5mm q A Figure 5-845 10. Adjusting the Registration of the Cassette Loosen the screw w shown in Figure 5-846, and adjust the position of the cassette hook plate q.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM D. Left Deck Pick-Up Assembly 1. 1) 2) 3) Removing the Pick-Up Assembly from the Copier Remove the left/right paper deck. Slide out the holding tray feeding assembly about 10 cm to the front. Remove the mounting screws q from the two positioning pins; then, remove the positioning pins w, and remove the left deck pick-up assembly e.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM n Orientation of the Pick-Up Roller Install the pick-up roller by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in mind: • The pick-up rollers used at the front and the rear are NOT interchangeable. • The collar of the pick-up roller used at the front is gold. When installing the pick-up roller q to the pick-up assembly, make sure that the round marking w on the side of the roller and the round marking e on the collar (gold) face the front.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 3. 1) 2) 3) Removing the Feeding Roller Remove the left deck pick-up assembly from the copier. Remove the stop ring q. Remove the pick-up roller w at the front; then, remove the feeding roller r together with the timing belt e. r q w e Figure 5-851 4. Removing the Separation Roller 1) Remove the left deck pick-up assembly from the copier. 2) Remove the mounting screw q, and detach the separation roller assembly w from the joint.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM e Figure 5-853 Note: The urethane sponge used on the roller is initially pink and changes to yellow over time, accelerated by exposure to light (pink to orange, and then to yellow). The fact is common to all urethane sponge types, and will not affect its physical performance. Keep in mind that color difference, if any, does not indicate different part types. 5.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM e 5 t 5 r w q q Feeding roller assembly w Belt pulley e Feeding roller (front) r Feeding roller shaft t Marking (roller) Figure 5-854 E. Pick-Up Vertical Path Roller Assembly 1. 1) 2) 3) Removing the Pick-Up Vertical Path Roller Assembly Open the upper right door and the lower right door. Remove the right deck pick-up assembly/cassette pick-up assembly.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM F. Registration Feeding Assembly 1. Construction Registration feeding assembly Figure 5-856 2. Removing the Registration Feeding Assembly 1) Open the front cover, and slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier. 2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover, and remove the transfer/separation charging assembly. 3) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the right rail support plate w; then, remove the registration feeding assembly pressure spring e.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 4) Remove the E-ring r, and push in the spindle shaft t to remove. 5) Disconnect the connector y, and remove the registration feeding assembly u from the fixing/feeding unit. u r t y Figure 5-858 3. Removing the Registration Roller (upper rubber roller) 1) Loosen the two set screws q on the electromagnetic clutch at the rear. 2) Remove the spring w, E-ring e, spacer r, bushing t, and bearing y. w rty e q Figure 5-859 5-94 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 3) Remove the spring u, E-ring i, spacer o, bearing !0, and bushing !1 at the front. 4) Remove the pre-transfer upper guide !2, and remove the registration roller (upper rubber roller) !3. !2 !3 o u !0 !1 i Figure 5-860 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM G. Feeding Assembly 1. Construction Feeding assembly Figure 5-861 2. Removing the Fixing/Feeding Unit 1) Remove the front cover; then, open the hopper assembly, take out the power switch assembly cover, and close the hopper assembly. 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. 3) Remove the screw q (one each at left and right), and remove the fixing feeding unit stopper w. w q Figure 5-862 (left stopper) 5-96 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM w q Figure 5-863 (right stopper) 4) Remove the fixing/feeding unit from the copier. Caution: Keep in mind that the fixing/feeding unit weighs about 15 kg. 3. 1) 2) 3) Removing the Feeding Belt Remove the fixing/feeding unit from the copier. Remove the fixing/feeding front cover. Remove the E-ring q, spacer w, and bearing e at the front. we q Figure 5-864 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 4) Remove the E-ring e and the two mounting screws r at the rear. r e Figure 5-865 5) Remove the E-ring t, gear y, and pin u at the rear. 6) Remove the E-ring i and bearing o at the rear. io yu t Figure 5-866 5-98 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 7) Remove the three harness retainers !0 and two edge saddles !1, and disconnect the connector !2; then, remove the screw !3, and remove the cord guide !4. !1 !2 !4 !0 !3 Figure 5-867 8) Remove the two screws !5, and remove the handle support plate !6. !5 !6 Figure 5-868 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 9) Remove the two mounting screws !7 (2 each at front and rear), and remove the feeding belt unit !8. !7 !8 Figure 5-869 (front) 10) Remove the screw @0, and remove the feeding upper plate !9 at the front; then, remove the feeding belt @1 and the postcard belt @2. @1 !9 @0 @2 (front) Figure 5-870 5-100 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM H. Holding Tray Assembly 1.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2. 1) 2) 3) Removing the Holding Tray from the Copier Open the front cover. Remove the fixing/feeding front cover. Slide the holding tray assembly to the front and out of the copier. 3. Removing the Holding Tray Re-Pick Up Assembly 1) Slide the holding tray assembly to the front and out of the copier.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 4) Remove the three mounting screws i (rear); while lifting the holding tray re-pick up assembly, disconnect the two connectors o, and remove the holding tray re-pick up assembly !0. i !0 o i Figure 5-874 (rear) 4. 1) 2) 3) 4) Removing the Holding Tray Registration Paper Sensor Open the front cover. Slide the holding tray to the front and out of the copier. Remove the holding tray re-pick up assembly.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 5. 1) 2) 3) Removing the Re-Pick Up Roller Open the front cover. Slide out the holding tray assembly to the front. Remove the mounting screw q (1 each), and remove the two pick-up rollers w. w q w Figure 5-876 6. 1) 2) 3) 4) Removing the Holding Tray Driver PCB Open the front cover. Slide the holding tray assembly to the front and out of the copier. Turn over the holding tray assembly. Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the holding tray driver PCB cover w.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 5) Remove the two mounting screws, and disconnect the nine connectors r (J201, J202, J203, J204, J205, J207, J208, J209, J210); then, remove the holding try drier PCB t. e r t Figure 5-878 7. 1) 2) 3) Removing the Holding Tray Y Motor Slide the holding tray to the front and out of the copier. Turn over the holding tray assembly. Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the right rail w. w q q Figure 5-879 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 4) Turn over the holding tray assembly. 5) Remove the E-ring e, flange r, and belt t. t e r Figure 5-880 6) Remove the two mounting screws y; then, turn over the holding tray Y motor assembly u, and disconnect the connector. y u y Figure 5-881 7) Remove the two mounting screws, and remove the holding tray Y motor. 5-106 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 8. 1) 2) 3) Removing the Y Motor Home Position Sensor Slide the holding tray assembly to the front and out of the copier. Remove the right rail, and turn over the holding tray assembly. Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the Y motor home position sensor assembly w. w q Figure 5-882 9. Removing the Holding Tray Inlet Assembly 1) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the inlet assembly front upper cover w. q w Figure 5-883 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2) Remove the mounting screw e, and remove the inlet assembly rear upper cover r. r e Figure 5-884 3) Remove the two mounting screws t, and remove the inlet assembly y. t y t Figure 5-885 5-108 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 10. Removing the Feeding Roller/Separation Belt Assembly 1) Slide the holding tray assembly to the front. 2) Remove the holding tray inlet assembly. 3) Remove the mounting screw q. q Figure 5-886 4) While opening the left cover w, remove the feeding roller/separation belt assembly e. w e Figure 5-887 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 11. Removing the Feeding Roller 1) Remove the feeding roller/separation belt assembly. 2) Remove the stop ring q and the bushing w at the front. q w Figure 5-888 3) Remove the stop ring e, gear r, and bushing t at the rear. 4) Remove the roller y from the feeding roller assembly. y rt e Figure 5-889 5-110 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 12. Removing the Separation Belt Assembly 1) Remove the feeding roller/separation belt assembly. 2) Remove the stop ring q and the bushing w at the front. q w Figure 5-890 3) Lift the front of the separation belt assembly, and shift it to the rear; then, remove the separation belt assembly. 4) Detach the belt from the separation belt assembly. 13.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 14. Positioning the Holding Tray Paper Deflecting Plate Drive Solenoid Install the solenoid so that its stroke (distance between rubber silencer and solenoid edge) is 5.0 ±0.3 mm. 5.0± 0.3m m Figure 5-892 15. Removing the Side Guide Plate Assembly 1) Mark the position of the side guide plate with a pencil or the like. (See Figure 5-901.) 2) Remove the two mounting screws q, and disconnect the two connectors; then, remove the side guide plate assembly w.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 16. Removing the Holding Tray X Motor 1) Remove the side guide plate assembly. 2) Remove the mounting screw, and remove the motor cover. 3) Remove the two mounting screws q, and disconnect the connector; then, remove the motor w. q w Figure 5-894 17. Removing the Holding Tray Re-Circulating Motor 1) Remove the side guide plate assembly. 2) With the paper jogging guide plate fully open, mark the position of the paper jogging guide plate assembly with a pencil or the like.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 4) Remove the mounting screw r, and remove the motor assembly t. t r Figure 5-896 18. Removing the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Solenoid 1) Remove the side guide plate. 2) With the paper jogging guide plate fully open, mark the position of the paper jogging guide plate assembly with a pencil or the like. 3) Remove the three mounting screws q, and disconnect the connector w; then, remove the front guide plate assembly e.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 4) Remove the mounting screw r, and remove the cover t. r t Figure 4-898 5) Remove the two mounting screws y, two grip rings u, and spring pin i; then, remove the solenoid o. i o y u Figure 5-899 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-115 Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 19. Installing the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Guide Plate Assembly Mark the position of the paper jogging guide plate assembly with a pencil or the like, and install the plate in its initial position. Figure 5-900 20. Installing the Holding Tray Assembly Side Guide Plate Assembly Mark the position of the side guide plate assembly with a scribe, and install it along the marking. Figure 5-901 5-116 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 21. Attaching the Timing Belt of the Holding Tray Assembly Paper Jogging Guide Plate Butt the rack plate of the paper jogging guide plate against section A (open state), and attach the timing belt to the pulley. A Figure 5-902 22. Positioning the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Solenoid When installing the solenoid, position it so that the stroke (distance between rubber silencer and solenoid edge) is 1.5 ±0.3 mm. 1.5±0.3mm Figure 5-903 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM I. Holding Tray Feeding Assembly 1. Removing the Holding Tray Feeding Assembly from the Copier 1) Open the front cover, and slide out the holding tray feeding assembly to the front. 2) Remove the three mounting screws q, and remove the holding tray feeding assembly front cover w. q q w Figure 5-904 3) Remove the five mounting screws e and two metal fixings r, and detach the holding tray feeding assembly t from the rail.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2. Removing the Sensor from the Holding Tray Feeding Assembly 1) Open the front cover, and slide out the holding tray feeding assembly to the front. 2) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the metal fixing w; then, remove the holding tray feeding sensor cover e from under the holding tray feeding assembly. r we q Figure 5-906 Caution: Do not open the holding tray feeding assembly upper guide more than it opens freely, or the stopper r will be damaged.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 5-120 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM This chapter explains the principles used to fuse toner images to transfer medium in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation to their timing of operation. It also shows how these units may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted. I. OUTLINE OF OPERATIONS..............6-1 A. Outline ...........................................6-1 B. Fixing Drive Assembly...................6-3 C. Controlling the Fixing Temperature ..................................
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM I. OUTLINE OF OPERATIONS A. Outline The upper roller, lower roller, and delivery roller of the fixing assembly are driven by the main motor through clutches. (See Figure 6-101.) The upper roller has two built-in heaters: after power-on, the sub heater is turned on only during WMUP, and the main heater is turned on and off during WMUP and during subsequent periods for temperature control. (See Figure 6-103.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM SL14 Activation • twice for large-size copy • once for small-size copy Reference: 1. Heater 120 V model: 790 W (main) + 410 W (sub) 220/240 V model: 1200 W (main) 2. Thermal switch: 240 ±10°C 6-2 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM B. Fixing Drive Assembly If a jam occurs in the fixing/delivery assembly, the DC controller PCB generates the fixing drive stop signal to turn on the fixing drive stop solenoid (SL3), thereby immediately stopping the fixing roller. The cleaning belt used to clean the upper fixing roller is taken up by the cleaning belt take-up arm moving up and down in response to the activation of the fixing cleaning belt solenoid (SL14).
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM Delivery flapper solenoid (SL2) Fixing assembly inlet guide drive signal (FXGDSD) Fixing cleaning belt drive solenoid (SL14) Fixing drive stop signal (FXDSD) Cleaning belt take-up arm Fixing cleaning belt drive solenoid drive signal (FCBSD) Delivery paper deflecting plate solenoid drive signal (DPDSD) External delivery detection signal (EXDPD) Internal delivery paper detection signal (IDPD) DC controller PCB Fixing cleaning belt Delivery paper deflecting plate Upper fixin
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM C. Controlling the Fixing Temperature The surface temperature of the machine's upper fixing roller is monitored by the main thermistor (TH1); measurements are taken and communicated to the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB. The DC controller PCB uses these measurements to vary the main heater drive signal (MHRD) and the sub heater drive signal (SHRD). The sub thermistor (TH2) is mounted at the rear of the upper fixing roller to check for an abnormal increase in temperature.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM The machine uses the six types of control shown in Tables 6-101 and -102 according to how much time has passed since power-on and the environmental conditions.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM w Copy Speed Down Sequence The machine is designed to turn out 50 copies normally and 60 copies when making one-sided copies of one original. To ensure good fixing, however, it uses a longer sheet-to-sheet distance, thereby keeping the fixing temperature to a specific value when the surface temperature of the fixing roller is as shown in Table 6-104 as detected by the main thermistor (TH1).
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM In down sequence, 40 cpm or 35 cpm mode is initiated to suit the surface temperature of the upper fixing roller. Normal sequence will be initiated when the surface temperature of the upper fixing roller reaches a specific level (Table 6-104); however, once copying has been suspended, WMUP sequence will be used until the surface temperature of the upper fixing roller reaches 195°C (as in auto start mode).
, "# !"# CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 60 min Copy Start key ON Pre-Heat key ON STBY INTR CNTR1 CNTR2 AER SCFWSCRVSCFWSCRVLSTR Auto shut-off ON STBY *1 Main heater (H1) Sub heater (H2) Main motor (M1) ON Pre-Heat indicator Flashing 210°C 205°C 200°C 195°C Mode H (17°C~) Mode M, L (12°C~17°C, ~12°C) 10% saving 180°C 25% saving 155°C 50% saving 110°C *1 : May be varied in service mode. Figure 6-104 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM D. Reciprocating Mechanism for the Main Thermistor (TH1) To prevent damage to the upper fixing roller by the main thermistor (TH1), the main thermistor is designed to slide back and forth in the axial direction of the upper fixing roller over a distance of 12 mm. The reciprocating cam is supplied with drive by the cleaning belt drive solenoid (SL14) through a one-way arm.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM E. Reciprocating Mechanism for the Upper Separation Claw To prevent damage to the upper fixing roller by the upper separation claw, the upper separation claw is slid back and forth in the axial direction of the upper fixing roller over a distance of 3 mm. Separation claw 3mm Upper fixing roller Separation claw Reciprocating cam Main motor M1 Internal delivery roller Figure 6-106 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM F. SSR Error Detection Circuit for the Fixing Heater The machine’s safety circuit for the fixing heater SSR uses the following signals sent to the DC controller PCB: 1. Fixing main heater drive signal (MHRD) 2. Main heater ON detection signal (MHOND) Figure 6-107 shows the main heater only, but the sub heater is controlled in the same way. Heater ON The CPU causes the SSRON signal to go ‘0’, and the MHRD signal goes ‘1’ to turn on the heater.
Q641 Rectifier circuit SSRON Figure 6-107 Front door switch SW2 Power switch SW1 Main heater H1 Power supply PCB Q643 FFURLS PC1 MSWA FDOD PWOFF +12V COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. AC driver PCB q Gate array +5V CPU Gate array DC controller PCB w MHOND CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM G. Locking Operation (fixing/feeding unit) Fixing/feeding unit locking solenoid drive signal J108B-2 (FFULSD) Spring clutch Fixing/feeding unit locking solenoid (SL13) M1 Fixing/feeding assembly DC controller PCB If copy paper is trapped over the fixing/feeding unit and the holding tray unit when the machine is stopped because of a jam, i.e.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM H. Error Detection Circuit 1. Outline Figure 6-109 is a block diagram showing the control circuit for the error detection circuit, and the circuit has the following functions: a. Monitoring the activation of the scanning lamp (LA1). b. Monitoring the activation of the fixing heater (main, H1; sub, H2). c. Monitoring the rotation of each motor in normal mode and in stream reading mode. Each function concentrates at the gate array on the DC controller PCB.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM As a result, the relay inside the power supply switch will be supplied with power, the power switch will be turned off, and the AC power supply will be cut off (error auto power off). DC controller PCB CVR ON Lamp regulator LA1 CVR ACTIVE Gate Error array Master CPU +12V Power switch OFF Figure 6-110 3. Fixing Heater Error Activation Detection Circuit The gate array generates the fixing heater ON signal (SSR ON), and receives the fixing heater ON detection signal (SSR ACTIVE).
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM Sub thermistor Main heater ON Sub heater ON 100/120V AC driver PCB TH2 TH1 H1 SSR ON SSR ACTIVE Main Sub H2 Gate array Error Overheating detected Main thermistor Master CPU FUSER TEMP Overheating ERROR open circuit detection 220/240V +12V AC driver PCB H1 Timer Power supply switch OFF DC controller PCB Figure 6-111 4.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM II. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Here, the copier is discussed in terms of its mechanical characteristics and operation and how to disassemble and assemble it. Be sure to observe the following for disassembly/assembly work: 1. ! Disconnect the power plug for safety before starting disassembly/assembly work. 2. Unless otherwise noted, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them. 3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM A. Fixing Assembly 1. Construction q w e q Fixing upper unit w Upper roller e Lower roller Figure 6-201 2. Locking Mechanism Fulcrum Locking arm Figure 6-202 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 3. Removing the Fixing Cleaning Belt Take-up roller Feeding roller Figure 6-203 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier. 2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover. 3) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the fixing upper cover w. w q Figure 6-204 6-20 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 4) Remove the two mounting screws e used to hold the fixing cleaning belt assembly in place, and open the fixing cleaning belt upper assembly r upward. r e Figure 6-205 5) Remove the cleaning belt feeding roller t and the cleaning belt take-up roller y by pushing them toward the rear. y t Figure 6-206 Caution: Be sure to remove the silicone oil collecting in the oil pan found under the cleaning belt feeding roller. COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 4. Installing the Fixing Cleaning Belt Install the fixing cleaning belt by reversing the steps used to remove it. 1) Wind the cleaning belt around the cleaning belt take-up roller q twice to three times. When installing it to the front, be sure that the arm guide plate w is on the outside of the take-up roller. At this time, check to make sure that the area coming into contact with the roller is impregnated with oil.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 5. 1) 2) 3) 4) Removing the Upper Fixing Unit Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier. Remove the fixing/feeding front cover. Remove the fixing upper cover. Open the fixing delivery assembly q. q Figure 6-209 5) Remove the two mounting screws w, and remove the flywheel mount e. e w Figure 6-210 6) Remove the E-ring r, and remove the flywheel t. r t Figure 6-211 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 7) Remove the fixing web, and clean the silicone oil pan. Remove the two mounting screws y, remove the two harness retainers u, and disconnect the three connectors i. y u i Figure 6-212 8) Open the fixing upper unit o slightly, and remove it by lifting it to the left; then, place it on a desk. Caution: The silicone oil in the silicone oil pan can start to drip during the work; if possible, drain it in advance. o Figure 6-213 6-24 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 6. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Removing the Fixing Heater Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier. Remove the fixing/feeding front cover. Open the fixing delivery assembly. Remove the flywheel. Remove the fixing upper cover, and remove the fixing web; then, clean the silicone oil pan, and remove the fixing upper unit. 6) Remove the faston q at the front of the heater (main heater, sub heater).
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 10) Pull out the main heater and the sub heater from the fixing assembly to the front with care not to damage them. Caution: When opening the fixing upper unit during inspection/maintenance work, you could cause the side plate of the upper fixing unit to push down the height adjusting support plate of the fixing assembly inlet guide, lowering the fixing assembly inlet guide.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 7. Installing the Fixing Heater Install the heater by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in mind: a. Do not touch the surface of the heater. b. Orient both heaters so that the sides with longer heater wires are toward the front. c. Install the main heater (790 W) to the right and the sub heater (410 W) to the left when viewing from the front. d.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 9) Remove the two stoppers t (front, rear). t Figure 6-218 (rear) t Figure 6-218a (front) 10) While paying attention to the thermistor and the thermal switch, remove the upper roller unit y. y Figure 6-219 6-28 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 11) Remove the C-ring u and the gear i at the front. 12) Remove the C-ring o and the gear !0 at the rear. 13) Pull out the bearing !1 and the bushing !2 found at the rear to the front. 14) Slide out the bearing !3 and the bushing !4 found at the front of the upper roller to the front. u !4 i !3 o !0 !1 !2 Figure 6-220 9. Installing the Upper Fixing Roller Install the upper roller by reversing the steps used to remove it.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 10. Removing the Thermal Switch 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier. 2) Remove the fixing/feeding assembly front cover. 3) Remove the flywheel. 4) Remove the fixing assembly upper cover and the stay cover. 5) Remove the fixing web. Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the oil pan w. 6) Remove the mounting screw e and faston r; then, remove the thermal switch assembly holder t. 7) Remove the four mounting screws y, and remove the thermal switch assembly.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 6) Remove the mounting screw e, and shift the thermistor assembly r to the right to remove. e r Figure 6-224 7) Remove the mounting screw t and two retaining screws y, and remove the main thermistor u. t y u y Figure 6-225 12. Removing the Lower Separation Claw Assembly 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier. 2) Remove the fixing/feeding assembly front cover. 3) Remove the flywheel. 4) Remove the fixing assembly upper cover.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 7) Remove the tension spring, and remove the lower separation claw assembly. 13. Removing the Lower Roller 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier. 2) Remove the fixing/feeding assembly front cover. 3) Remove the flywheel. 4) Remove the fixing assembly upper cover and the fixing cleaning belt; then, remove the silicone oil pan. 5) Remove the upper roller assembly of the fixing assembly. 6) Remove the lower separation claw support plate.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 15. Adjusting the Nip (tightening the pressure adjusting nut) The nip width is correct if it is as indicated in Table 6-201. Otherwise, turn the pressure adjusting nut. c b A3 size Feeding direction Center of copy paper a Figure 6-229 Caution: a and c represent points 10 mm from both ends of copy paper. Dimensions Measurements* b 7.3 ± 0.5 mm |a–c| 0.5 mm or less *Be sure both upper and lower rollers are sufficiently warm before taking measurements.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 16. Adjusting the Fixing Clutch If you have replaced any of its associated parts, adjust the fixing clutch by turning the set screw e so that the gap between the 41T gear q and the control ring w is 0.1 to 0.3 mm (equivalent of four sheets of 64 g/m2 plain paper). w q e Figure 6-230 6-34 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 17. Removing the Sub Thermistor (TH2) 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier. 2) Remove the screw w, and remove the fixing assembly upper cover q; then, remove the screw r, and remove the harness cover e. q w e r Figure 6-231 3) Remove the screw y, and remove the sub thermistor unit t. y t t Figure 6-232 Caution: The sub thermistor cannot be replaced in the field. Replace it as part of the sub thermistor unit t shown in Figure 6-232. COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM B. Delivery Assembly 1. Construction Delivery upper guide (fixing/delivery assembly) Figure 6-233 2. 1) 2) 3) Removing the Delivery Upper Guide (fixing/delivery assembly) Open the front door, and slide the fixing/feeding unit to the front and out of the copier. Remove the fixing/feeding assembly front cover. Remove the mounting screw q, and pull out the pin w; then, remove the delivery upper guide e. e w q Figure 6-234 6-36 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 3. Removing the Fixing/Feeding Assembly Locking Assembly 1) Slide the fixing/feeding assembly unit to the front and out of the copier. 2) Remove the two mounting screws q and E-ring w; then, disconnect the connector e, and remove the fixing/feeding locking assembly r. e w r q Figure 6-235 4. 1) 2) 3) Removing the External Delivery Roller Slide the fixing/feeding assembly unit to the front and out of the copier. Remove the fixing/feeding assembly front cover.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 4) Remove the fixing/feeding assembly locking assembly. 5) Remove the two E-rings e, gear r, torque limiter t, and bushing y at the front. 6) Remove the E-ring u and the bushing i at the rear, and remove the external delivery roller o. o y e t e r Figure 6-237 (front) i u Figure 6-237a (rear) 6-38 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 5. Removing the External Delivery Paper Sensor and the Internal Delivery Paper Sensor 1) Remove the external delivery roller. 2) Remove the two mounting screws q; then, remove the external delivery sensor assembly and the internal delivery sensor assembly w. w q Figure 6-238 6. Removing the Fixing Assembly Outlet Paper Sensor Assembly 1) Slide the fixing/feeding unit to the front; then, remove the front over and the fixing assembly upper unit. (See p. 6-23.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 7. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Removing the Internal Delivery Assembly Roller Open the front door, and slide the fixing/feeding unit to the front and out of the copier. Remove the fixing/feeding assembly front cover. Remove the fixing assembly upper unit. (See p. 6-23.) Remove the fixing assembly lower separation claw assembly. (See p. 6-31.) Remove the E-ring q, gear w, and parallel pin e at the front. Remove the E-ring r and the bushing t.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS This chapter shows the copier's external parts, and explains the principles used for the copier's various control mechanisms in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation to their timing of operation. It also shows how these units may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted. I. II. III. IV. CONTROL PANEL .............................7-1 A. Outline ...........................................7-1 B. Operation.............................
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS I. CONTROL PANEL A. Outline The machine’s control panel consists of the control panel controller PCB, 320 × 240dot liquid crystal display panel unit, transparent touch panel, and key switch panel, and it has the following functions: q Data communication w LCD processing e LCD contrast automatic and manual adjustment r Touch switch input t Key switch input B. Operation 1.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 2. LCD Processing The microprocessor on the DC controller PCB sends commands to the LCD controller according to instructions from its programs. In response, the LCD controller interprets and executes the commands. The LCD controller also turns on and off various instructions according to programs.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS LCD controller PCB Column driver Column driver Column driver Column driver Row driver Row driver Display memory LCD panel Row driver CPU Touch panel Key control panel LED display Control panel controller PCB DC controller PCB Figure 7-102 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 3. Automatic Control of LCD Contrast The control panel controller PCB is equipped with a mechanism capable of automatically adjusting the LCD contrast according to changes in temperature. A thermistor (TH911) is mounted on the control panel controller PCB to monitor the temperature inside the control panel unit.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 4. Touch Switch Inputs The keys on the touch panel and the control panel controller PCB are connected as shown in Figure 7-102. The touch switch panel consists of a sheet of glass having a transparent conducting membrane and a sheet of film with spacers in between; it shows a pattern consisting of 15 rows and 20 columns.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS II. FANS The machine is equipped with six fans used to exhaust ozone, draw stray toner, and cool the inside. Table 7-201 shows the function of each fan and the filter used and the orientation of the fan, while Table 7-203 shows when each fan turns on. FM8 FM5 FM7 FM6 FM3 FM2 Figure 7-201 7-6 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS Notation Name Orientation Filter Ozone Function Discharges exhaust from each fan to the outside of the machine. FM2 Exhaust fan Blowing FM3 Fixing assembly heat exhaust fan Drawing Prevents increases in temperature inside the machine caused by the fixing heater. Exhausts silicone oil vapors. FM5 Developing fan Drawing Draws toner astray near the developing assembly. FM6 Feeding fan Drawing Keeps copy paper close to the feeding belt.
7-8 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. Feeding fan (FM6) Cleaner fan (FM7) Exhaust fan (FM2) Fixing heat exhaust fan (FM3) Developing fan (FM5) Scanner cooling fan (FM8) Copy Start key ON Figure 7-203 Sequence of Operations 10 min 10 min 15 min : Half-speed rotation Power switch OFF WMUP INTR CNTR LSTR WMUPR STBY INTR CNTR AER SCFW SCRVSCFW SCRV LSTR STBY Power switch ON : Power switch CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS III. POWER SUPPLY A. Outline of Power Supply Figure 7-301 is a block diagram showing the distribution of each power supplies.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS B. Power Supply Circuit The machine’s DC power supply provides DC outputs: 38 VU, 24 VU, 24 VR, 24 VA1, 24 VA2, 24 VH, 12 VU, and 5 VR. The AC power supply consists of (a) an AC direct input line without a switch, (b) an input line by way of a power supply switch SW1, (c) an input line by way of power switch SW1 and door switch SW2, providing the DC power supply with DC AC power through three channels.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS Reference: The DC voltage tolerances are as follows: • +38VU +10%, –7% • +24VU +10%, –7% • +24VR ±2% • +24VA1 +10%, –20% • +24VA2 +10%, –7% • +24VH +10%, –7% • +5VR ±4% • +12VU +10%, –7% However, the above assume that the AC input inaccuracy is ±10%.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS The power supply PCB is equipped with a fuse on its AC power input side and an overcurrent protection circuit in its DC circuit. If an overcurrent flows because of a short circuit in the line or the like, the protection circuit turns on to turn off the output of the power supply unit. In such a case, disconnect the copier's power plug, and remove the cause of activation before turning on the power.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS IV. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Here, the copier is discussed in terms of its mechanical characteristics and operation and how to disassemble and assemble it. Be sure to observe the following for disassembly/assembly work: 1. ! Disconnect the power plug for safety before starting disassembly/assembly work. 2. Unless otherwise noted, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them. 3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS A. External Covers w q e u y t i r q w e r t y u i Front door Multifeeder door Upper right door (4) Lower right door (2) Lower right cover (1) Rear cover (4) Upper left cover (5) Lower left cover (7) Figure 7-401 t q e w r q Inside upper cover (2) w Fixing/feeding assembly front cover (3) e Connector cover (1) r Power switch assembly cover (3) t Hopper cover Figure 7-402 7-14 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS Remove the covers as needed when cleaning, inspecting, or repairing the inside of the machine as follows; those covers that may be detached by merely removing their mounting screws on their own are omitted from the discussions: 1. Removing the Front Door 1) Open the front door, and remove the mounting screw w of the stopper tape q; then, remove the two stoppers e. e w q Figure 7-403 2) Pull out the pin r. r Figure 7-404 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 3) Pull out the front door t by lifting it at an angle. t Figure 7-405 2. Removing the Inside Upper Cover 1) Open the front door, and shift the fixing/feeding assembly lever; then, slide out the fixing/feeding unit. 2) Remove the three mounting screw q, and remove the inside upper cover w. w q Figure 7-406 7-16 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 3. Removing the Fixing/Feeding Unit Front Cover 1) Open the front door, and slide out the fixing/feeding unit. 2) Remove the screw q of the releasing lever; then shift and remove the releasing lever w while pushing the rear of the releasing lever locking shaft (closer to the inside of the fixing/feeding assembly). 3) Remove the mounting screw e, and remove the fixing knob r. 4) Remove the three mounting screws t, and remove the fixing/feeding assembly front cover y.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 5. Sliding Out the Hopper Assembly 1) Open the front door, and open the hopper cover q. Remove the three mounting screws e; then, remove the three mounting screws w, and connector cover. Disconnect the connector, and slide out the hopper r to the front and turn it. r w e q Figure 7-409 Caution: Check to make sure that the connector is connected before installing the hopper assembly. 6. 1) 2) 3) 4) Removing the Process Unit Open the front door.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 6) Insert the drum rotating tool e into the cut r in the drum shaft. Fix the drum in position so that the drum will not rotate counterclockwise, and insert a screwdriver into the center hole t of the drum rotating tool, and remove the drum fixing screw. Caution: If you rotate the drum counterclockwise, the cleaning blade will be displaced in relation to the drum, causing cleaning faults. Be sure to fix the drum in place before removing the drum fixing screw.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7) Slide out the process unit y until it stops. y Figure 7-412 8) Hold the process unit as shown, and remove it. Right hand Left hand Figure 4-413 7-20 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7. Installing the Process Unit Install the process unit by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in mind: 1) When placing the processing unit, be sure to align it along the guide plates q at the front and the rear of the left rail. On the right rail side, be sure to place the process unit on the L-shaped stay.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS B. Control Panel 1. Removing the Control Panel from the Copier 1) Remove the mounting screw of the upper left cover and the two stepped screws (M3x2) of the standard white cover. 2) Open the RDF; then, remove the three mounting screws q and the three RDF catch metal fixings w. q w q w Figure 7-416 3) Remove the three screws e, and remove the upper right cover r. r e Figure 7-417 7-22 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 4) Remove the mounting screw t of the control panel. t Figure 7-418 5) Open the front door; then, remove the three mounting screws y and the connector cover u, and disconnect the connector, and open the hopper i. i y u Figure 7-419 Caution: Check to make sure that the connector is connected before installing the hopper assembly. COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 6) Shift the fixing/feeding assembly releasing lever o from horizontal to vertical position, and slide out the fixing/feeding assembly !0. 10 o Figure 7-420 7) Remove the three mounting screws !1, and remove the inside upper cover !2; then, slide in the fixing/feeding assembly. 12 11 Figure 7-421 7-24 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 8) Remove the three mounting screws !3; then, remove the control panel, and turn it over. Caution: Take care not to damage the surface of the control panel by the chassis of the copier. 13 Figure 7-422 9) Disconnect the three connectors (J911, J915, J955). 2. Removing the Control Panel PCB 1) Remove the four mounting screws q, and shift the back cover w to the right to remove. q w Figure 7-423 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 3. Removing the Touch Panel 1) Remove the five mounting screws q, and remove the center support plate w. q q w q Figure 7-424 2) Remove the three flat cables e (J912, J913, J916) on the control panel CPU PCBl, and disconnect the connector r (J956) of the inverter PCB. 3) Remove the five mounting screws t, and remove the touch panel. y t e r t Figure 7-425 7-26 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 4. Removing the Control Panel Controller (CPU) PCB 1) Remove the five mounting screws q; then, remove the control panel right support plate w and the control panel controller (CPU PCB) e. e q w q Figure 7-426 2) Remove the 13 mounting screws r, and remove the numeric keypad t. t r Figure 7-427 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS C. Door Switch Assembly 1. 1) 2) 3) 4) Removing the Front Door Switch Assembly Open the front door. Remove the inside upper cover. Remove the control panel. Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the door switch assembly w. q w Figure 7-428 2. Removing the Multifeeder Door Switch Assembly 1) Remove the front door, and remove the hopper assembly. 2) Remove the three mounting screws q, and remove the power supply switch assembly cover w.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 3) Remove the three mounting screws e, and remove the multifeeder door sensor/multifeeder door catch assembly r. e r Figure 7-430 4) Remove the sensor from the multifeeder door sensor/multifeeder door catch assembly. 3. Installing the Drum Heater Switch Install the switch so that its right side is in ON position. COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS D. Fan Unit 1. Removing the Scanner Cooling Fan 1) Open the front door, and remove the inside upper cover. (See p. 7-16.) 2) Disconnect the three connectors (J1, J2, J3) of the potential control PCB, and disconnect the connector w (J921) of the service switch PCB. 3) Remove the four mounting screws e, and disconnect the connector r; then, remove the scanner cooling fan unit t together with the potential control PCB. w q e r e e t Figure 7-431 2.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 3. Removing the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the three mounting screws q, and disconnect the connector w; then, remove the fixing heat exhaust fan e. q w e q Figure 7-433 4. Removing the Developing Fan 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Disconnect the connector (J301) q of the high-voltage transferor PCB; then, remove the three mounting screws w, and shift the high-voltage transformer assembly e.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 3) Remove the two mounting screws r, and disconnect the connector t; then, remove the developing fan y. r t r y Figure 7-435 5. 1) 2) 3) Removing the Cleaner Fan Remove the rear cover. Remove the three mounting screws, and shift the high-voltage transformer PCB. Remove the two mounting screws q, and disconnect the connector w; then, remove the developing fan assembly e. q w e Figure 7-436 7-32 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 6. 1) 2) 3) 4) Removing the Feeding Fan Remove the rear cover. Remove the three mounting screws, and shift the high-voltage transformer PCB. Remove the cleaner fan. Remove the two mounting screws q, and disconnect the connector w; then, remove the feeding fan e. q w e Figure 7-437 E. Removing the Counter Assembly 1) Open the front door, and remove the inside upper cover; then, remove the mounting screws from the control panel.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS F. Main Motor Assembly 1. 1) 2) 3) Removing the Main Motor Remove the rear cover. Remove the high-voltage PCB. Remove the spring q, and loosen the tension pulley; then, remove the four mounting screws w, detach the belt from the end of the main motor, and remove the main motor e. q w e Figure 7-439 7-34 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS G. Fixing/Waste Toner Drive Assembly 1. Construction Figure 7-440 2. Removing the Waste Toner Bottle 1) Remove the two mounting screws, and remove the lower right cover; then, remove the waste toner bottle toward the multifeeder. 3. Removing the Fixing/Waste Toner Drive Assembly 1) Open the front door, and draw out the process unit, the fixing/feeding unit, and the holding tray assembly about 10 cm from the copier. 2) Remove the rear cover.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 6) Remove the spring q, and loosen the tension pulley w; then, detach the timing belt e. w q e Figure 7-441 7) Remove the three mounting screws r, and disconnect the holding tray assembly drawer connector t. r t Figure 7-442 8) Remove the mounting screw y of the DC controller PCB, and disconnect the three connectors u (J113, J114, J115) and the two relay connectors i. 7-36 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS i y u Figure 7-443 9) Remove the four mounting screws o, and remove the fixing/waste toner drive assembly !0 together with the waste toner feeding assembly. Caution: Waste toner will start to pour out of the end of the waste toner pipe when the fixing/waste toner drive assembly is removed. Be sure to stop up the end with a ball of paper to prevent it. o 10 o o Figure 7-444 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS H. Main Drive Assembly (drum/developing) 1. Construction Figure 7-445 2. Removing 1) Open the front door, and slide out the process unit, fixing/feeding unit, and holding tray assembly about 10 cm from the copier. 2) Remove the rear cover. 3) Remove the high-voltage PCB and the high-voltage transformer assembly. 4) Remove the waste toner bottle. 5) Remove the cleaner fan, feeding fan, and developing fan. 6) Remove the fixing/waste toner drive assembly.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7) Remove the three mounting screws q, and free the harness guide 1 w. w q Figure 7-446 8) Remove the seven mounting screws e, and remove the main drive unit r. e r e Figure 7-447 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS I. Vertical Path Drive Assembly 1. Construction Figure 7-448 2. 1) 2) 3) 4) Removing Remove the Remove the Remove the Remove the lower right cover. rear cover. waste toner bottle. five mounting screws q, and remove the rear right grip assembly w. q w q Figure 7-449 7-40 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 5) Remove the three mounting screws e, and remove the waste toner bottle support plate r. e r e Figure 7-450 6) Remove the two mounting screws t, and remove the harness guide 2 y. y t Figure 7-451 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7) Remove the four mounting screws u, and disconnect the two connectors i; then, remove the vertical path drive assembly o. i o u u Figure 7-452 J. Pick-Up Drive Assembly 1. Construction Figure 7-453 7-42 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 2. Removing 1) Open the front door, and slide out the process unit, fixing/feeding unit, and holding tray assembly about 10 cm from the copier. 2) Remove the rear cover. 3) Remove the high-voltage transformer PCB and the high-voltage transformer assembly. 4) Remove the waste toner bottle. 5) Remove the cleaner fan, feeding fan, and developing fan. 6) Remove the fixing/waste toner drive assembly. 7) Free the harness guide 1. (See Figure 7-446.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 10) Remove the eight mounting screws e, and disconnect the two connectors r; then, remove the pick-up drive assembly. e r e e e Figure 7-455 K. Duplexing Drive (1) Assembly 1. Construction Figure 7-456 7-44 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 2. Removing 1) Open the front door, and slide out the holding tray assembly about 10 cm from the copier. 2) Remove the rear cover. 3) Remove the DC controller PCB. 4) Remove the spring q of the tensioner, and detach the timing belt. 5) Remove the four mounting screws w, and remove the duplexing drive (1) assembly e. q w e w Figure 7-457 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS L. Lifter Drive Assembly 1. Construction Figure 7-458 2. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Removing Open the front door, and slide out the holding tray assembly 10 cm from the copier. Remove the rear cover. Remove the waste toner bottle. Remove the rear right grip assembly. Remove the three mounting screws q, and remove the waste toner bottle support plate w. q w q Figure 7-459 7-46 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 6) Disconnect the connector e, and remove the three screws r; then, remove the lifter drive assembly t. r t e Figure 7-460 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS M. Cassette Pick-Up Drive Assembly 1. Construction Figure 7-461 2. Removing 1) Open the front door, and slide out the holding tray assembly about 10 cm from the copier. 2) Remove the rear cover. 3) Remove the waste toner bottle. 4) Remove the waste toner bottle support plate. 5) Remove the rear right bottle support plate. 6) Remove the DC controller PCB, and detach the timing belt. 7-48 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS 7) Remove the two mounting screws q each of the paper width sensor of the cassettes 3 and 4; then disconnect the connector w. q w Figure 7-462 8) Remove the five mounting screws e, and remove the cassette pick-up drive assembly r. r e e e Figure 7-463 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS N. Attaching the Drive Belt Attach the drive belt on the gears and rollers as shown. Drum drive belt Main motor Registration feeding drive belt Pick-up motor Fixing/waste toner drive belt Holding tray drive belt Pick-up drive belt Figure 7-464 Caution: Make sure that the holding tray drive belt is on the roller under (inner side) the pickup drive belt and the pick-up drive belt is on the roller above (outer side) the pickup drive belt.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS O. DC Controller PCB 1. 1) 2) 3) Removing the DC Controller PCB Removing the rear cover. Disconnect the connector of the DC controller PCB. Remove the five mounting screws q used to fix the mounting plate in place, and remove the DC controller PCB together with the mounting plate w. q w q Figure 7-465 Caution: The DC controller PCB is equipped with a built-in battery (BAT101).
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS P. DC Power Supply Assembly 1. Removing the DC Power Supply Assembly 1) Remove the upper left cover and the lower left cover. 2) Remove the nine mounting screws q, and remove the DC power supply protection plate w. w q Figure 7-466 3) Disconnect the nine connectors (J303, J304, J305, J306, J308, J309, J311, J312, AC relay connector). 4) Remove the two mounting screws e, and remove the DC power supply PCB r together with its mount.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS Q. High-Voltage Transformer Assembly 1. 1) 2) 3) Removing the High-Voltage Transformer Assembly Remove the rear cover. Disconnect the four connectors q (J201, J202, J203, J301). Remove the three mounting screws w, and remove the PCB e. q w e w Figure 7-468 4) Remove the two fastons r, and disconnect the connector t; then, remove the two mounting screws y, and remove the transformer assembly u. y u y t r Figure 7-469 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS R. Power Supply Inlet Assembly 1) 2) 3) 4) Remove the rear cover. Remove the upper left cover and the lower left cover. Remove the four mounting screws q. Disconnect the four connectors w, and remove the power supply cord mount e. w q e q Figure 7-470 7-54 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 This chapter explains the basic operation of the Paper Deck-A1 in view of various functions. It also discusses the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system, and provides an outline of the timing at which each part operates. Note that the Paper Deck-A1 is referred to as “side paper deck” so as to distinguish it from the copier's front paper deck. I. SIDE PAPER DECK ...........................8-1 A. Inputs to and Outputs from the Side Deck Driver .........
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 I. SIDE PAPER DECK A. Inputs to and Outputs from the Side Deck Driver 1. Inputs to the Side Deck Driver (1/2) Side deck driver PCB +5VR Deck lifter upper limit sensor Q102 J21-1 -2 -3 J107-11 -10 -9 J3A-11 -10 -9 DLUL When the deck lifter is at the upper limit, '1'. (The light-blocking plate is at Q102.) +5VR Deck paper supply position sensor Q103 J20-1 -2 -3 J109-3 -2 -1 J8-3 -2 -1 DPSP When the deck lifter is at power supply position, '1'.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 2. Inputs to the Side Deck Driver (2/2) Side deck driver PCB SW100 Deck OPEN switch LED100 Deck OPEN indication J100-1 J4B-4 -2 -3 -3 -2 -4 -1 J22-1 J4-6 -2 -4 OPEN switch PCB DOPN* When SW101 is pressed to open the deck, '0'. +5VR When the LED is ON, '0'. DOLON* (The LEDs flash while the deck lifter motor is rotating.) SW102 Deck OPEN detecting switch NO DOPD When the deck is open, '1'. (SW102 is not pressed.) DLLD When the deck is at the lower limit, '1'.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 3. Outputs from the Side Deck Driver (1/1) Side deck driver PCB +38VU J1-1 J5-1 -2 -2 +5VR Deck main motor M101 J2-1 J7-9 -3 -7 -5 -5 -7 -3 -9 -1 -2 -8 -4 -6 J24-1 J105-1 J6-1 -2 -2 -2 J12-1 J108-2 J3B-6 -2 -1 -5 J13-1 -10 J3B-14 CL102 -2 -9 -13 SL101 J18-1 -2 J107-5 -4 J3A-5 -4 SL102 J111-2 -1 Deck lifter motor M102 +12VU. DMON DMFG See p. 8-13. DMHS See p. 8-15.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 B. Pick-Up 1. Outline The side paper deck (“deck” hereafter) is capable of accommodating 3,500 sheets of copy paper at once (A4, LTR, B5; 80 g/m2), and picks up copy paper according to the control signal from the copier’s DC controller PCB. The lifter of the deck is driven by the deck lifter motor (M102), and copy paper is fed using the drive of the deck main motor (M101). 2.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. Q105 Deck pick-up roller releasing solenoid drive command (DPRSD*) Deck main motor drive command Deck pick-up clutch drive command (DPUCD*) Deck vertical path clutch drive command (DVPCD*) Deck pick-up guide OPEN signal (DPUGO) Deck vertical path paper detection signal (DVPD) Deck pick-up paper detection signal (DPPD) CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 DC controller PCB Side deck driver PCB CL101 M101 Q106 CL102 SL101 Q107 Figure 8-103 CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 3. Sequence of Operations (deck pick-up) Copy Start key ON INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY Deck main motor (M101) Deck pick-up clutch (CL102) Deck pick-up roller releasing solenoid (SL101) Deck pick-up sensor (Q107) Deck vertical path sensor (Q106) Deck vertical path clutch (CL101) Figure 8-104 8-6 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 C. Detection of Paper for the Deck 1. Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper The presence/absence of paper inside the deck is checked by the deck paper OUT sensor (Q108). When the deck runs out of paper, and the paper detecting lever of the pick-up roller assembly leaves the deck paper OUT sensor, the copier’s control panel indicates the Add Paper message.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 D. Deck Lifter 1. Lifter Operation The lifter of the deck is connected to the reel by means of a cable, and is driven by the deck lifter motor (M102). The lifter is moved up and down by switching the direction of the rotation of the motor. When the deck (compartment) is pushed into the copier, the deck OPEN switch (SW102) is pushed, and the lifter moves up.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 Deck main motor Deck lifter Deck OPEN position sensor detecting switch (Q110) (SW102) Deck paper supply Deck lifter upper position sensor limit sensor (Q103) Deck pick-up roller M101 (Q102) Deck OPEN switch (SW100) Deck feed roller Deck lifter motor M102 Deck separation roller Deck lifter cable Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch (SW103) Lifter Copy paper Figure 8-106 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 2. Detecting the Level of the Stack in the Deck (compartment) The drive of the deck lifter motor (M102) is received by a coupling, and is transmitted to the rack by means of a drive belt. The rack is equipped with a black belt which moves in conjunction with the movement of the rack within the indicator window in the deck front cover.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 E. Opening/Closing the Deck (compartment) 1. Opening/Closing the Deck When the deck OPEN switch (SW100) is pressed, the deck lifter motor (M102) starts to rotate and the lifter inside the deck starts to move down. The deck motor stops when the deck paper supply position sensor (Q103) detects the lowering lifter. At the same time, the deck OPEN solenoid (SL102) turns on to release the locking, and the deck will push out to the front several centimeters by the work of a spring.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 2. Sequence of Operations (deck opening/closing) Deck OPEN switch ON Compartment SET OFF Flashing Flashing Deck OPEN indicator (LED100) Deck lifter motor (M102) * Deck paper supply position sensor (Q103) * Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch (SW103) Deck OPEN solenoid (SL102) Compartment open Deck OPEN detecting switch (SW102) Deck lifter position sensor (Q110) Deck lifter DOWN Deck lifter UP * : Varies according to the level of the stack.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 F. Controlling the Deck Motor 1. Controlling the Deck Main Motor (M101) The deck main motor is controlled by the copier’s DC controller; Figure 8-110 shows the circuit used to drive the deck main motor, and the circuit has the following functions: q Turning on and off the deck main motor. w Switching the speed of rotation of the deck main motor. a.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 b. Switching the Speed of Rotation of the Motor So as to accommodate future machines, the side deck driver PCB is equipped with a DIP switch (SW1) for switching the pick-up feeding speed. When installing the deck to the copier, check to make sure that both bits of the DIP switch are at ON (deck main motor high-speed signal DMHS=0); otherwise, the wrong pick-up/feeding speed will be selected, causing jams. 8-14 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 2. Controlling the Deck Lifter Motor (M102) The deck lifter motor control circuit is found on the side deck driver PCB. See Figure 8-111 for its block diagram. The combination circuit within the figure consists of various logic circuits, and the deck lifter motor is rotated clockwise/counterclockwise based on combinations of the deck lifter motor drive signal (DLMON*) and the deck lifter UP signal (DLUP*) from the copier’s DC controller PCB.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 Deck OPEN detection signal (DOPD) 24VU 24VU 24VU Deck OPEN detecting switch (SW102) (Q2001) Deck driver Deck lifter motor DOWN drive signal (Q156) CPU Deck lifter motor UP drive signal M102 Deck lifter motor drive signal (DLMON*) Deck lifter UP signal (DLUP*) Deck lifter motor Motor drive circuit Deck OPEN signal (DOPN*) Deck lifter upper limit detection signal (DLUL) Combination circuit Deck OPEN detection signal (DLPD) Deck lifter lower limit detection signal (DLLD) Q
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 II. DETECTING JAMS A. Outline The side paper deck is equipped with the two sensors shown in Figure 8-201 used to check if copy paper is moving correctly. The copier’s microprocessor reads in the signals from the sensors at such times as programmed in advance to identify a jam. When the copier’s microprocessor identifies a jam, it discharges all sheets moving ahead of the jam, and then stops the machine.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 The copier’s microprocessor identifies any of the following conditions as a jam: 1. When copy paper is present at any of the sensors at power-on, end of wait-up, or during standby. 2. Deck Pick-Up/Vertical Path Delay Jam Copy Start key ON Jam indicator PKUPR SCFW SCRV SCFW Deck pick-up clutch (CL102) Jam check Deck pick-up sensor (Q107) Deck vertical path sensor (Q106) Deck main motor (M101) Normal Error Figure 8-202 3.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 III. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Here, the copier is discussed in terms of its mechanical characteristics and operation and how to disassemble and assemble it. Be sure to observe the following for disassembly/assembly work: ! Disconnect the power plug for safety before starting disassembly/assembly 1. work. 2. Unless otherwise noted, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them. 3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 A. External Covers w q e t r !1 !0 y o u i Figure 8-300 q Vertical path cover (front) w Vertical path unit cove e Vertical path assembly opening/ closing grip r Vertical path cover (rear) t Rear cover 8-20 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. y u i o !0 !1 Upper cover Right cover Front cover Compartment opening/closing switch Upper front cover Deck releasing grip CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 1. Removing the Front Cover 1) Detach the deck from the copier, and push down the latch plate w of the compartment with a finger to open the compartment. w (rear) q Figure 8-301 2) Loosen the four screws e, and remove the front cover r of the deck toward the front. e r Figure 8-302 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 Caution: When installing the front cover to the deck, make sure that the coupling for the paper level indicator is correctly aligned. Aligned Figure 8-303 Caution: Install the front cover so that the gap between the front cover and the upper front cover is 3 ±1 mm. Upper front cover Front cover m m 1 3± Figure 8-303a 8-22 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 Caution: If you inadvertently moved the paper level indicator drive belt behind the front cover after removing the front cover, or if you have moved the deck lifter, move the deck lifter to its lower limit, and move the drive belt by hand until it gives slight resistance in the direction of the arrow (Figure 8-304, increasing the white area) before installing the front cover.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 2. Removing the Vertical Path Cover (rear) 1) Remove the deck from the copier; then, remove the six screws q, and remove the rear cover w. 2) Holding the vertical path assembly opening/closing grip, open the deck vertical path assembly. 3) Remove the two screws e, and remove the vertical path cover (rear) r. e r q q w q Figure 8-305 8-24 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 3. Removing the Right Cover 1) Detach the deck from the copier, and push down the latch plate w of the compartment q with a finger to open the compartment q. w (rear) q Figure 8-306 3) Remove the three screws e, and shift the right cover r in the direction of the arrow (Figure 8-307) to remove. r e Figure 8-307 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 4. Removing the Upper Cover 1) Remove the vertical path cover (rear). (See p. 8-24.) 2) Push down the latch plate w of the compartment q to open the compartment. w (rear) q Figure 8-308 3) Remove the three screws e, and disconnect the connector r; then, remove the upper front cover t. e r t Figure 8-309 8-26 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 4) Close the deck vertical path assembly, and remove the two screws y; then, move the upper cover u in the direction of the arrow (Figure 8-310). y u Figure 8-310 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 B. Paper Deck 1. Removing the Deck from the Copier 1) To prevent deformation of the roll support plate q, place a stack of copy paper e (about 8 cm high) on the floor to serve as the base for the deck w. 8 cm (approx.) w e q e Figure 8-350 2) Remove the right cover. (See p. 8-25.) 3) As shown, match the hole in the deck lower left stay and the hole in the compartment, and insert a screwdriver r from inside the compartment to prevent the compartment from closing.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 4) Remove the four screws t, and remove the deck y from the deck mount u. y (left side) u t t (right side) Figure 8-352 5) Holding the deck as shown (Figure 8-353), and place it on the stack of paper prepared in step 1). i Figure 8-353 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 2. Removing the Compartment 1) To prevent deformation of the roll support plate q, place a stack of copy paper e (about 8 cm high) on the floor to serve as the base for the deck w. 8 cm (approx.) w e q e Figure 8-354 2) Detach the deck from the copier, and push down the latch plate t of the compartment r with a finger to open the compartment. t (rear) r Figure 8-355 8-30 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 3) Remove the screw y and the stopper plate u, and slide out the compartment i to the front. u (rear left of compartment) y i Figure 8-356 4) Remove the right cover. (See p. 8-25.) 5) Remove the screw o of the harness guide, and disconnect the two connectors !0; then, remove the three screws each of the compartment rails !1 left and right, and remove the compartment i by lifting it. 6) Place the compartment i on the stack of paper prepared in step 1).
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 3. Changing the Deck Paper Size If you need to change the paper size for the paper deck to suit the user’s needs, perform the following: 1) Open the compartment of the paper deck, and remove all copy paper. 2) If the lifter of the paper deck is up, turn on the copier, and push the sensor lever w of the paper supply position sensor inside the compartment q so that the lifter lowers to the lower limit.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 4. Adjusting the Deck Registration If the left/right registration (standard, 0 ±1.5 mm) must be adjusted, perform the following: 1) Draw out the compartment, and fix the latch plate q of the deck opening solenoid (SL102) using the two screws w. (At this time, refer to line e on the latch plate.) q e w (rear left of compartment) Figure 8-360 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 5. Positioning the Roll If the compartment cannot be opened/closed smoothly, requiring adjustment of the roller position, perform the following: 1) Remove the front cover. (See p. 8-21.) 2) Slide out the compartment fully, and adjust the four mounting screws r on the roll support plate e so that the roll q is about 3 mm from the floor w. 3 m (approx.) r e q w Figure 8-361 8-34 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 C. Drive System 1. Removing the Deck Pick-Up Clutch (CL102) 1) Remove the deck pick-up unit. (See p. 8-44.) 2) Disconnect the connector q, and remove the E-ring w; then, remove the deck pickup clutch e. q e w Figure 8-400 2. Removing the Deck Vertical Path Clutch (CL101) 1) Remove the vertical path cover (rear). (See p. 8-24.) 2) Disconnect the connector q, and remove the E-ring w; then, remove the deck vertical path clutch e. q e w Figure 8-401 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 3. Removing the Deck Main Motor (M101) 1) Detach the deck from the copier; then, remove the six screws, and remove the rear cover. 2) Disconnect the two connectors q, and remove the four screws w, and remove the deck main motor e. (At this time, take care not to damage the gear at the end of the motor spindle.) w q e Figure 8-402 8-36 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 4. Removing the Deck Lifter Motor (M102) 1) Open the compartment of the deck; remove all copy paper, if any. 2) Turn on the copier; if the lifter of the deck is up, push the sensor lever q of the paper supply position inside the compartment with a finger. Stop the lifter w about 7 cm from the base of the compartment, and insert a hex wrench r into the hole of the lifter drive shaft e, and fix the lifter drive shaft e temporarily in place to prevent it from turning.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 5. Removing the Lifter Cable (deck front) 1) Open the compartment of the deck; remove all copy paper, if any. 2) Remove the screw, and remove the trailing edge guide plate from inside the compartment. 3) Push the sensor lever q of the paper supply sensor inside the compartment with a finger to lower the lifter until the holes (left-right) in the compartment side plate and the holes (left/right) in the lifter match; then, insert two screwdrivers (to position the lifter).
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 6) Remove the coupling shaft t and the E-ring y; then, remove the pulley cover u. 7) Remove the two screws i and the cable fixing plate o; then, remove the lifter cable !0 on the outside. 8) Remove the two screws !1 and the cable fixing plate !2; then, remove the lifter cable !3 on the inside. • To detach the lifter cable !3 on the inside from the pulley !4 on the inside, remove the two set screws !6 on the pulley !5 on the outside, and remove the pulley in advance.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 6. 1) 2) 3) Removing the Lifter Cable (deck rear) Open the compartment; remove all copy paper, if any. Remove the screw, and remove the rear edge guide plate inside the compartment. Push the sensor lever q of the paper supply position sensor inside the compartment with a finger to lower the lifter until the holes (left/right) in the compartment side plate and the holes in the lifter (left/right) match; then, insert two screwdrivers w.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 4) Remove the compartment. (See p. 8-30.) 5) Remove the screw e, and remove the sensor plate r; then, remove the screw t, and remove the harness guide y. 6) Disconnect the five connectors u, and remove the five screws i; then, remove the metal plate o. u t i e i r o i u y Figure 8-410 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 7) Insert a hex wrench !1 in the hole of the lifter drive shaft !0 to keep the shaft from turning. Caution: If you fail to perform this step, the lifter cable will become slack when the lifter unit is removed. !0 !1 Figure 8-411 8) Remove the five screws !2, and remove the lifter motor unit !3. !2 !2 !3 Figure 8-412 8-42 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 7. Routing the Lifter Cable 1) Check to make sure that the lifter drive shaft and the lifter are held in place with hex wrenches and screwdrivers. (q an w of Figure 8-413) 2) Fix the cable fixing plate in place on the lifter with two screws. (e of Figure 8-413) 3) Hook the lifter cable on the pulley. (r of Figure 8-413) 4) Hook the ball of the lifter cable on the lifter drive shaft; then, wind it about 1.5 times along the groove of the pulley.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 D. Feeding System 1. 1) 2) 3) Removing the Deck Pick-Up Unit Remove the upper cover. (See p.8-26.) Disconnect the two connectors q, and remove the four screws w. Remove the deck pick-up unit e. e w q w Figure 8-450 Caution: When installing the deck pick-up unit e, be sure to tighten the two screws shown in advance. e Screws Figure 8-451 8-44 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 2. Removing the Deck Pick-Up Roller 1) Remove the deck pick-up unit. (See p. 8-44.) 2) Turn over the deck pick-up unit, and remove the resin ring q (1 each); then, remove the deck pick-up roller w (1 each). w q Figure 8-452 3. Orientation of the Deck Pick-Up Roller When installing the deck pick-up roller, check to make sure that the makings on the roller and the side of the collar are as shown in Figure 8-453.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 4. 1) 2) 3) Removing the Deck Feeding Roller Remove the deck pick-up unit. (See p. 8-44.) Open the deck vertical path assembly, and turn over the deck pick-up unit. Remove the resin ring q, and remove the deck feeding roller w and the drive belt e toward the front. w e q Figure 8-454 5. Orientation of the Deck Feeding Roller When installing the deck feeding roller q, make sure that the belt pulley w is toward the front.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 6. Removing the Deck Separation Roller 1) Detach the deck from the copier, and remove the two screws q; then, remove the separation roller support plate w. 2) Remove the joint, and remove the deck separation roller e. q w Figure 8-456 Caution: The urethane sponge used on the deck separation roller is initially pink and changes to yellow over time, accelerated by exposure to light (pink to orange, and then to yellow).
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 7. Adjusting the Deck Separation Roller Pressure If double feeding or separation failure occurs when pick-up is from the side paper deck, adjust the position of the pressure spring of the deck separation roller • If pick-up failure occurs, move the spring in the direction of arrow A. • If double feeding occurs, move the spring in the direction of arrow B. A B Figure 8-457 8.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 E. Electrical System 1. Removing the Side Deck Driver PCB 1) Detach the deck from the copier; then, remove the six screws, and remove the rear cover. 2) Disconnect the 10 connectors q, and remove the four screws w; then, remove the deck driver PCB e. e q w Figure 8-500 2. Removing the OPEN Switch PCB 1) Detach the deck from the copier, and push down the latch plate w of the compartment q with a finger to open the compartment. w (rear) q Figure 8-501 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1 2) Remove the three screws e, and disconnect the connector r; then, remove the upper front cover t. e r t Figure 8-502 3) Remove the two screws y, and remove the OPEN switch PCB u. u y Figure 8-503 8-50 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION This chapter introduces requirements for the site of installation, and shows how the copier may be installed using step-by-step instructions. I. II. SELECTING THE SITE ......................9-1 UNPACKING AND INSTALLING ........9-4 A. Unpacking......................................9-5 B. Installing the Scanner....................9-7 C. Installing the Fixing Assembly .......9-8 D. Installing the AP Kit and the Charging Assemblies ....................9-10 E. Installing the Copy Tray...
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION I. SELECTING THE SITE Make sure of the following when selecting the site of installation; if possible, pay a visit to the user’s before delivery of the machine. 1. The site must provide an exclusive power source (rating ±10%), enabling proper grounding. 2. The site must be 7.5° to 32.5°C/45.5° to 90.5°F in temperature and 5% to 85% RH in humidity. Avoid areas near water faucets, water boiler, humidifier, or refrigerator. 3.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 10cm/3.9in. min. 50cm/19.7in. min. 60cm/23.6in. min. 50cm/19.7in. min. Figure 9-101 7. Keep the machine in a well ventilated area of the room, making sure that the exhaust of another machine, if any, will not be drawn into the machine. Do not place the machine near the air inlet of the room.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION Wrong 2 Figure 9-103 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLING When a piece of metal is brought in from a cold to a warm area, droplets of water tend to form on its surface. This phenomenon is known as condensation, and the use of a copier subjected to condensation can turn out blank copies. If you are installing a machine just brought in from a cold place, keep it without unpacking for at least one hour so that it becomes used to the room temperature. Caution: A.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION A. Unpacking Step Work 1 Unpack the copier, and remove the plastic sheets. 2 Insert the grip that comes with the machine into the front of the pick-up side. Remarks Caution: Be sure to hold the stopper so that it faces down; otherwise, it can slip off while lifting the machine. 3 Hold the grips on the pick-up side (front/rear), and lift the machine slightly to remove the two pads. Then, remove the cardboard sheet (base plate).
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION Step Work 5 Shift the two adjusters up (front), and check to make sure that they are released. Remarks Adjusters 6 Remove the two slope plates out of the skid. 7 Turn over the slope plates; then, match the pin holes in the skid and the pin holes in the slope plates, and insert the pins (1 each). • Hold the grips (front/rear) of the machine, and move the machine along the slope plates to the floor.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION B. Installing the Scanner Step Work 1 Remove the packing tape from the machine. 2 Open the RDF. 3 Remove the scanner fixing (packing tape). (Keep the fixing in store. You may need it when relocating the machine in the future.) COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. Remarks Remove the protective tape from the size index and the protective sheet from the copyboard glass. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION C. Installing the Fixing Assembly Step Remarks Work 1 Open the front door. 2 Shift the fixing assembly releasing lever in the direction of the arrow (counterclockwise) to release the transfer/separation charging assembly. Then, slide out the fixing feeding unit to the front. Fixing/feeding assembly Releasing lever 3 Remove the tag and the separation releasing block from the fixing/feeding assembly.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION Step Work 5 Remove the two fixing assembly nip releasing screws. Remarks Screw (rear) Screw (front) 6 Close the fixing/delivery assembly. COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION D. Installing the AP Kit and the Charging Assemblies Remarks Step Work 1 Remove the screw from the releasing lever of the fixing/feeding assembly. While pushing the rear (fixing/feeding assembly inside) of the releasing lever locking shaft, shift up the releasing lever to remove the releasing lever. Remove the screw, and remove the fixing knob; then, remove the three screws, and remove the fixing/feeding assembly cover.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION Remarks Step Work 3 Install the fixing/feeding assembly front cover with three screws. Install the fixing knob and the releasing lever; then, lock the lever in place (lever to the left). Slide the fixing/feeding assembly into the machine. 4 Open the multifeeder door and the upper right door, and remove the screw from the door tape (door stopper) of the front door (so that the front door will not close the hopper when the hopper is opened.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION Remarks Step Work 9 Disconnect the connector, and loosen the screw; then, move the charging assembly metal fixing in the direction of the arrow (upper right), and fix it in place with a screw. Remove the primary charging assembly. Using alcohol, clean the primary charging assembly. 10 Connector Disconnect the connector, and remove the screw. Then, slide out the pre-transfer charging assembly. Using alcohol, clean the pre-transfer charging assembly.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION Step Work 12 Insert the drum rotating tool into the cut-in of the drum shaft. While holding the rotating tool so as to prevent the drum from rotating counterclockwise, remove the drum fixing screw and the drum fixing (cut-in member). Remarks Caution: 1. If you let the drum to rotate counterclockwise, the cleaning blade will not be in contact with the drum correctly, causing cleaning faults.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION Remarks Step Work 15 Slide the process unit into the machine; then, using the drum rotating tool, match the cut-in of the drum shaft and the cut-in of the drum. Thereafter, insert the drum fixing (cut-in member) to hold the drum in place with the drum rotating tool, and insert the screw in the tool to fix it in place. 16 Remove the drum protection sheet from the fixing/feeding assembly, and slide the fixing/feeding assembly into the machine.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION Step Work 19 Remove the two screws, and remove the cover from the lower rear right of the copier. You will be using the drum protection sheet when servicing the process unit; remove dirt, if any, keep it together with the drum rotating tool near the waste toner case (behind the machine). (Keep the drum rotating tool in the hole of the grip found above the waste toner case together with the toner case cap.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION E. Installing the Copy Tray 1. Replacing the Delivery Gear If you are not installing a stapler sorter or a sorter to the machine (i.e., if you will be using the copy tray), you must replace the delivery gear with the gear (black) for the copy tray. If you are installing a stapler sorter or a sorter, on the other hand, be sure to check that the gear is positioned as shown in illustration 1 of the table, and skip the steps that follow.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 2. Replacing the Delivery Roller Leaf Spring When removing the stapler sorter or the sorter from the machine (i.e., to use the copy tray), you must replace the two leaf springs of the delivery roller with leaf springs (weaker spring pressure) identified with a blue label. When installing a stapler sorter or a sorter to the machine, check to find out if the two leaf springs at the center are stronger than the two leaf springs on the sides; if so, do not perform the steps that follow.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION F. Checking the Developing Assembly Remarks Step Work 1 Open the multifeeder tray. Open the multifeeder door, and remove the screw from the door tape. 2 Screw Remove the screw, and slide the developing assembly locking unit in the direction of the arrow (rear) to remove. Screw 3 Take the developing assembly out of the shipping box. Check the surface of the cylinder for scratches while turning the developing cylinder gear by hand.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION Remarks Step Work 5 Insert the developing assembly locking unit from the right side (rear); when, it is horizontal, insert it to the left side (front). Fix the developing assembly locking unit with a screw. Screw 6 Install the door tape of multifeeder door with a screw. COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. the CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION G. Installing the Pick-Up Assembly For the 4-cassette type, skip steps 3, 4, 5, 6,7, and 8. Remarks Step Work 1 Open the multifeeder; then, holding the grip of the multifeeder, open the multifeeder door. Shift the lever in the direction of the arrow, and remove the pick-up roller pressure releasing spacer.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION Step Work Remarks 3 Slide out the right deck until it stops, and remove the right/left stopper up. Stopper 4 Lift the right deck off the machine and onto the floor. 5 Slide out the left deck halfway, and remove the pressure releasing spacer from the right deck side. 6 Push in the left deck. 7 Insert the right deck into the machine, and install the left/right stopper. 8 Push in the right deck/cassette, and close the upper right cover, lower right cover, and multifeeder.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION H. Supplying Toner Remarks Step Work 1 Check to find out the orientation (left/right) of the toner bottle mouth. Left 2 Shake the toner bottle ten or more times vigorously. 3 Open the hopper cover, and fit the boss on the tip of the toner bottle in the groove of the toner supply mouth. • The toner supply mouth and the toner bottle lock into position. Right q 9-22 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. w CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION Step Work 4 Holding the shutter (black) of the machine on the right side of the toner supply mouth of the hopper, pull it to the right. Keep pulling until the shutter stops. 5 Pull the shutter on the toner bottle side to the right. 6 Toner starts to fall from the toner bottle to the hopper; tap lightly on the bottom of the toner bottle until all toner has fallen. COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. Remarks CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION Remarks Step Work 7 Holding the shutter of the toner bottle, push it to the left until it stops. 8 Holding the shutter on the machine, push it to the left until it stops. 9 Push the shutter on the machine until it is at ns indicated on the hopper assembly. • The toner bottle gets unlocked. Marking 9-24 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION Step Work 10 Pull the toner bottle in the left upward direction, and remove it upward. 11 Close the hopper cover. COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. Remarks CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION I. Connecting the RDF Connector Step Work 1 Remove the face plate of the RDF connector. 2 Insert the RDF connector (male) to the connector (female) of the machine. 9-26 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. Remarks CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION J. Image/Operation Checks and User Mode Step Work 1 Connect the power plug to the power outlet, and insert the door switch actuator into the door switch assembly of the front door. 2 Slide out the holding tray and the holding tray feeding assembly, and check to make sure that the parts are not damaged or soiled with foreign matter. 3 Slide out the paper deck and the cassette to the front, and remove the packing materials.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION Remarks Step Work 6 Adjust the size guide plate to suit the needs of the user, and place copy paper in the cassette and the paper deck. 7 Attach the appropriate stickers to the paper size plate of the paper deck and the cassettes. 8 Slide the cassette and the paper deck into the machine. 9 Insert the copy tray to the copier. 10 When the wait period ends, start service mode. (Press the service switch with a clip through the hole in the inside upper left cover.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION Step Work 11 Perform the following while toner is being supplied. 1. Remove the screw used to keep the center of the right cover in place, and install the original tray to the machine (right) with two stepped screws. (You will not be using the removed screw.) 2. Attach the mode memory sheet to the cover of the toner supply mouth. Remarks Stepped screws Original tray Reference: If you find installing the original tray difficult, loosen the two mounting screws and start over.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION Step Work 15 Set appropriate settings for the standard mode to suit the needs of the user in user mode and service mode (*5*). (Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.) 16 Remove the door switch actuator, and install the door tape (door stopper); then, close the front door. 17 Clean up the area around the machine. 18 Move the machine to the site of installation, and adjust the two adjusters.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION III. RELOCATING THE MACHINE If you must relocate the machine after installation by truck or other means of transportation, perform the following steps: Step Work Checks 1 Make a copy in Direct. 2 Remove all copy paper from the left/right paper deck and each cassette. 3 Turn off the power switch, and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet. Check to make sure that the lens is within lens hood. 4 Fix the No.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION IV. INSTALLING THE CONTROL CARD V 1) Open the RDF, and remove the three mounting screws q and three metal fixings w (catch for RDF). q w q w Figure 9-401 2) Remove the three screws e at the front of the upper right cover of the machine. e Figure 9-402 9-32 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 3) Remove the screw r from the control panel. r Figure 9-403 4) Open the front door, and open the hopper cover. Remove the three screws t and the connector cover y; then, disconnect the connector and slide out the hopper assembly u to the front and rotate it. u t y Figure 9-404 5) Shift the fixing/feeding assembly releasing lever i from vertical to horizontal position, and slide out the fixing/feeding assembly o. o i Figure 9-405 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 6) Remove the three screws !0, and remove the inside upper cover !1; then, slide in the fixing/feeding assembly. !0 !1 Figure 9-406 7) Remove the three screws !2; then, remove the control panel, and turn it over. Caution: Take care not to damage the surface of the control panel by the chassis of the machine. !2 Figure 9-407 9-34 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 8) Remove the self-tapping screws !3, and shift the control panel PCB cover !4 about 5 mm to the right to remove. !4 !3 !3 Figure 9-408 9) Remove the control card inlet face plate !5. !5 Figure 9-409 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 10) Remove the screw !6 from the face plate. !6 Figure 9-410 11) Place the sheet !7 over the hole in the control panel (display hole of the control card). !7 Figure 9-411 9-36 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 12) Remove the protective sheet from the display of the control card. 13) Fix the control card in place with four screws !8. At this time, insert a card into the control card, and fix the control card in place where the card can be slid in and out smoothly. !8 Figure 9-412 Further, check to make sure that the connector !9 for the printer is centered over the hole. !9 Figure 9-413 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 14) Install the grounding wire @0 of the control card as shown in Figure 9-414. @0 Figure 9-414 15) Disconnect the shorting connector @1 shown in Figure 9-415. @1 Figure 9-415 16) Connect the 4P connector of the machine and the 4P connector of the control card. Caution: Be sure to lead the harness through the harness retainer so that it will not come into contact with the scanner cable or the drive pulley. 9-38 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 17) Remove the protective sheet from the control panel plate of the control card. 18) Install the control panel plate @2 of the control card to the control panel of the machine. @2 Figure 9-416 19) Install the control panel to the machine. 20) Install the hopper and the cover to the machine. Caution: When installing the hopper assembly, check to make sure that the connector is connected. 21) Turn on the machine, and check the operation of the control card.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION V. INSTALLING THE COPY DATA CONTROLLER-A1 Note: The Copy Data Controller-A1 is not available in certain sales areas. A. Setting the Board 1) Remove the two screws, and remove the top cover. Screw Top cover Screw Fig. 9-501 2) Set the DIP switch (SW1, SW5) on the Copy Data Controller-A1 according to the needs of the user. 2-1) Set the DIP switch (SW1-4) according to the type of copier.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION SW1 Position 1~3 OFF Selects normal operation. 4 ON Selects IPC communication. If this model. OFF Selects serial communication. If existing machine. ON Selects the use of a central control device. Requires a Copy Data Interface Board-B1. OFF Selects normal operation or remote Requires a commercially available control using commercially available modem and a Copy Data Interface modems. Board-B1 if remote control using commercially available modems is desired.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 2-3) If the user does not want control by group, set the DIP switch (SW5-4) to OFF. If you are connecting a Copy Data Interface Board-B1, Remote Diagnostic Unit-A1, or Copy Data Interface Board-A1, see A. “Setting the Board” in the appropriate Installation Procedure. LED1 LED2 LED3 SW2 SW3 EPROM SRAM LED4 LED5 LED6 JC5 SW4 1 SW1 ON SW5 ON SW1 6 JA2 JB1 JC9 IPC CPU 6 1 JB2 JC6 J5 6 JA1 JC8 SW5 6 1 1 Fig.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION b. If you are not connecting a Remote Diagnostic Unit-A1 or a Copy Data Interface Board-B1, i.e., if a Power Supply-A1 is not necessary, JA1 JA2 Fig. 9-505 4) If the user will be using a card reader, connect the card reader relay cable to the Copy Data Controller-A1 J4 (9p). J4 Card Reader-A1 relay cable Fig. 9-506 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION B. Installing to the Copier 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Keep the following in mind when installing the Copy Data Controller-A1 to the copier: Observe the laws and regulations of the country. Make sure that the copier has been properly installed before starting the work. Make sure that the copier’s power plug is disconnected during the work. Identify the type of screw (length, diameter), and be sure to use the correct screws. Prepare settings data in advance on a computer at the service station.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 3) If the user will be using a Card Reader-A1, connect the Card Reader-A1 relay cable directly to the connector on the copier’s DC controller PCB. (At this time, disconnect the relay postheader from the relay cable.) 4) Fix the Copy Data Controller-A1 to the copier’s rear cover with four screws. Screws Screws Fig. 9-509 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION C. Checking the Operation 1) If you are not connecting a Remote Diagnostic Unit-A1 or a Copy Data iterface Board-B1, i.e., if a Power Supply-A1 is not necessary, go to step 4). Connect the connector of the Power Supply-A1 to the connector of the Copy Data Controller-A1 as indicated. (Make sure that the cord is in the groove of the board.) Connector on the Copy Data Controller-A1 Connector of the Power Supply-A1 Groove of the board Fig.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 3) Turn on the copier’s main switch, and check that LED2 on the Copy Data ControllerA1 flashes. Make one copy, and check that LED3 flashes during copying operation. LED2 LED3 LED1 LED2 LED3 SW2 SW3 EPROM SRAM LED4 LED5 LED6 JC5 SW1 ON JA2 JB1 JC9 IPC CPU 6 1 JB2 JC6 J5 6 JA1 JC8 SW4 1 SW5 ON Fig. 9-512 4) If you are connecting a Remote Diagnostic Unit-A1 or a Copy Data Interface BoardB1, i.e., if a Power Supply-A1 is necessary, go to step 5).
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 5) If the user does not want group control, go to step 11). Set the mode of input, type of control, and paper size according to the needs of the user. Shift the DIP switch (SW5-3) on the Copy Data Controller-A1 to ON. LED1 LED2 LED3 SW2 SW3 EPROM SRAM LED4 LED5 LED6 JC5 CPU 1 SW1 ON 6 6 JB2 1 JA2 JB1 JC6 J5 6 JA1 JC8 JC9 IPC SW4 SW5 ON 1 SW5-3 Fig. 9-514 6) Connect the connector of the Ten Key Pad-A1 to the connector (J3) on the Copy Data Controller-A1.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 7) Push the switch (SW2) on the Copy Data Controller-A1 to enter service mode. SW2 LED1 LED2 LED3 SW2 SW3 EPROM SRAM LED4 LED5 LED6 JC5 6 SW1 ON JA2 JB1 JC9 IPC CPU 1 JB2 JC6 J5 6 JA1 JC8 SW4 1 SW5 ON Fig. 9-516 8) Set the mode of input as follows: 8-1) Select card or ID input using the Ten Key Pad-A1. (The default is card input.) 8-2) To change from card input to ID input, operate as follows: To change from ID to card* input, go to step 8-4).
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION n Using an Existing ID a) Set the DIP switch (SW1) on the Copy Data Controller-A1 as indicated: Bit 1, 2 3 SW1 Position ON OFF Table 9-503 b) Press the switch (SW4) on the Copy Data Controller-A1. LED5 turns on for a brief moment when the data has been drawn successfully. c) LED5 flashes if the attempt to draw the data fails. Press the switch (SW4) once again, and check that LED5 turns on. The copier cannot deliver paper while data is being drawn.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9) Set the mode of control. 9-1) Set the mode of control using the Ten Key Pad-A1. Press / until the display shows FORMAT=1 . 9-2) According to the type of copier and the specifications of the user, set the mode of control as indicated. (The default is ‘1’.) No. No. of groups Paper size Mode — 1 3000 5 2 1000 5 one-sided/two-sided 3 1000 5 mono/2-color/full-color Table 9-505 9-3) To select ‘3’ as the mode of control, for example, 1. The display shows FORMAT=1 .
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 10) Set the control paper size. 10-1) Use the DIP switch on the Copy Data Controller-A1 and the Ten Key Pad-A1 to change the control paper size. If the default represents the control paper size, go to step 11). 10-2) Use the / key to scan through the paper sizes. (However, control paper size 5 ‘OTH’ cannot be changed and is not displayed.) EX1: 1. The display shows SIZE 1 =A3 . 2. Press the key. 3. The display shows SIZE 2 =A4 . 4. Press the key. 5. The display shows SIZE 3 =B4 . 6.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 10-3) Study the conversion table for paper codes.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 11-4) Press the switch (SW2). SW2 LED1 LED2 LED3 SW2 SW3 EPROM SRAM LED4 LED5 LED6 JC5 CPU 1 SW1 ON 6 6 JB2 1 JA2 JB1 JC6 J5 6 JA1 JC8 JC9 IPC SW4 SW5 ON 1 SW5-3 Fig. 9-520 11-5) Check that the Ten Key Pad-A1 shows the following, and disconnect the Ten Key Pad-A1. Fig. 9-521 12) Attach the Switch Settings label to the top cover, and record the setting of each switch on the label. Screw Top cover Switch Settings label Screw Fig.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 13) Fix the top cover with two screws. (At this time, make sure that the cable of the power supply unit is fixed in place inside the Copy Data Controller-A1 and is not trapped by the top cover.) 14) If you are connecting the Control Card Printer A-1, connect it to the connector (J4) of Copy Data Controller-A1. (As necessary, use a relay cable.) If off-line control is planned, connect it to the RS232C I/F connector of Copy Data Controller-A1. J4 RS232C I/F connector Fig.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION VI. INSTALLING THE REMOTE DIAGNOSTIC DEVICE II Note: The Remote Diagnostic Device II is not available in certain sales areas. A. Installation to the Copier Caution: Keep the following in mind when installing the RDD to the copier: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. This accessory is to be installed by a qualified personal. Make sure the copier has been properly installed before starting the work. Keep the copier’s power cord disconnected during the work.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 2) Connect the Power Supply Unit’s connector t to the RDD’s connector y as shown. y t Fig. 9-602 3) Remove the two screws i, and detach the face cover u from the copier’s rear cover. i i u Fig. 9-603 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 4) Connect the RDD’s cable to the connector J128 on the copier’s DC controller PCB. Connector (J128) Fig. 9-604 5) Fix the RDD in place on the copier’s rear cover with four screws !2; use the screws that come with the RDD. !2 !2 Fig. 9-605 9-58 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 6) Remove the slack from the cable between the copier and the RDD; keep the excess cable to the RDD using the harness band !3. !3 Fig. 9-606 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7) Shift bit 4 of the DIP switch 2 !4 to ON so that the communication mode between the RDD and the copier is IPC mode. !4 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 6 1 1 BAT1 SW3 SW2 LED5 LED6 LED4 1 SW4 2 IC6 CN4 SW1 CN3 CN2 Fig.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION !6 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 6 BAT1 1 1 1 SW3 SW2 LED5 LED6 LED4 SW4 2 IC6 CN4 15 SW1 CN3 CN2 Fig. 9-608 1 2 3 4 5 6 9) Set the bits of the DIP switch 3 !7 on the RDD’s PCB as indicated in the table. !7 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 6 1 1 BAT1 LED5 LED6 LED4 1 SW3 SW2 SW4 2 IC6 CN4 SW1 CN3 CN2 Fig.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 10) Fit the Power Supply Unit into the power plug, and check that LED 1 !8 (green) on the RDD’s PCB comes on. !8 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 6 BAT1 1 SW2 LED5 LED6 LED4 1 1 SW3 SW4 2 IC6 CN4 SW1 CN3 CN2 Fig. 9-610 11) Reset the RDD’s RAM. Set the bits on the DIP switch 2 !9 on the RDD’s PCB as indicated in the table, and press the push switch 4 @0 to make sure that LED5 @1 (red) comes on. Setting OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF See step 9).
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 12) After making sure that LED5 @1 (red) has come on, set the bits on the DIP switch 2 !9 on the RDD’s PCB as indicated in the table, and press the push switch 4 @0 to make sure that LED5 @1 (red) goes out, indicating that the RAM has been reset. Setting OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON See step 9).
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 14) Connect the RDD to the telephone line. If you are connecting the RDD on its own, connect the modular jack cable to the RDD’s connector @3 (LINE). If you will be using the RDD’s extra circuit, connect the existing telephone or fax machine to the RDD’s connector @4 (TEL), and connect the telephone circuit to the RDD’s connector @3 (LINE). LED1 LED2 LED3 2 6 BAT1 1 SW2 LED5 LED6 LED4 1 1 SW3 SW4 2 IC6 CN4 SW1 CN3 @4 CN2 @3 Fig.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 17) Check that you can place a telephone call from the RDD to the computer in the service station. Press the push switch 4 @0. LED6 @7 (red) should come on; it will go out when transmission ends successfully, or will start to flash if transmission fails. Retransmission is executed in response to a press on the push switch 4 @0 while LED6 @6 is flashing. Transmission is canceled in response to a press on the push switch 1 @7 while LED6 @6 is flashing.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 19) Press the copier’ COPY START key to make sure that LED3 @9 (pink) flashes each time a copy is delivered. @9 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 6 BAT1 1 SW2 LED5 LED6 LED4 1 1 SW3 SW4 2 IC6 CN4 SW1 CN3 CN2 Fig. 9-618 20) Attach the Switch setting label #0, to the RDD’s top cover q; then, record the setting of each switch on the label. w #0 q w Fig. 9-619 21) Fix the RDD’s top cover q in place using two screws w.
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION 9-66 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION This chapter provides tables of periodically replaced parts and consumables/durables and scheduled servicing charts. I. II. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS ...10-1 CONSUMABLES AND DURABLES ...10-2 A. Copier ............................................10-2 B. Paper Deck-A1 ..............................10-3 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. III. IV. SCHEDULED SERVICING TABLE ....10-4 SCHEDULED SERVICING CHART ...10-6 A. Copier ............................................
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS Some parts of the machine must be replaced on a periodical basis to maintain the performance of the machine at a specific level regardless of the presence/absence of damage (when they fail, they will affect the performance to a significant degree). Schedule the replacement so that it coincide with a scheduled service visit. as of July 1997 No.
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION II. CONSUMABLES AND DURABLES Some parts of the machine may need replacement once or more because of wear or damage. Use the table as a reference, and replace them as needed. A. Copier as of July 1997 No.
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION No.
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION III. SCHEDULED SERVICING TABLE Caution: 1. As a rule, provide scheduled servicing every 250,000 copies. 2. Check the Service Record before setting out on a visit, and take any parts likely to need replacement. 3. If you use alcohol to clean a charging wire, check to make sure it has fully dried before installing it to the machine. Step Work Checks Remarks 1 Meet the person in charge. Check the general condition. 2 Take notes of the counter reading.
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION No. Work Checks Remarks 7 Clean the transfer guide. • Transfer guide plate (upper, lower) • Transfer/separation charging guide rail 8 Check and clean the cleaner assembly: • Magnet roller (check) • Separation claw (clean) • Side scraper (check) 9 Clean the separation/feeding assembly: • Feeding belt After cleaning, install the photosensitive drum.
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION IV. SCHEDULED SERVICING CHART Caution: Do not use solvents or oils other than those specified. A. Copier : Clean : Replace : Oil : Adjust : Inspect Intervals Unit Part at instal- every every every every lation 250,000 500,000 750,000 1,000,000 Use blower brush; for No. 5 mirror, use mirror cleaning tool. No. 1/No.
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Intervals Unit Part at instal- every every every every lation 250,000 500,000 750,000 1,000,000 Blade *Replace edge. Apply toner. * Cleaner Remarks Remove paper lint. Side scraper assembly Separation claw Inlet guide Fixing assembly Take up during installation. Fixing web Thermistor Oil receptacle (upper) (lower) Separation claw Delivery assembly (upper/lower) Remove as necessary.
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION B. Paper Deck-A1 : Clean : Replace : Oil : Adjust : Inspect Intervals Unit Part at instal- every every every every lation 250,000 500,000 750,000 1,000,000 Remarks Pick-up roller Pick-up Feeding roller assembly Separation roller Vertical path, roll 10-8 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter provides tables of maintenance/inspection, standards/adjustments, and identification of problems (image fault/malfunction). I. II. III. IV. V. VI. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ....................................11-3 A. Image Adjustment Basic Procedure....................................11-3 B. Points to Note for Scheduled Servicing......................................11-4 STANDARDS/ADJUSTMENTS ........11-5 A. Image Adjustment .......................11-5 B.
Guide to the Troubleshooting Table You will find troubleshooting steps organized in tables which are modified versions of general flow charts. Study the following for an idea of how to consult them. EX.AC power is absent. Cause Step Checks YES/NO Action Power plug 1 Is the power plug connected to the power outlet? NO Connect the power plug. Covers 2 Are the front door and the delivery cover closed firmly? NO Close the door and the cover.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING (Steps) (Checks) (YES/NO) (Action) 1 Is the power plug connected to the power outlet? NO Connect the power plug. NO Close the door or the cover. YES 2 Are the front door and the delivery door closed firmly? YES 3 Is the specified voltage at the power outlet? NO The problem is not of the copier. Advise the user. YES Omitted.
I. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION A. Image Adjustment Basic Procedure n Non-AE, Copy Density at 5 Clean the charging wire. Is there a difference in density between front and rear? Check the height of the charging wire. Check the copy paper and the transfer system. NO Is the density of gray scale No. 10 proper? YES Is the density of gray scale No. 1 too low (light)? NO Is the density of gray scale No.
B.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING II. STANDARDS/ADJUSTMENTS A. Image Adjustment 1. Adjusting the Image Leading Edge Margin Select ‘LE_BLANK’ in service mode ( ] 3 ] ). Make adjustments so that the image leading edge margin is 4.5 ±1.5 mm when the Test Sheet is copied in Direct. (unit: 0.1 mm) 4.5±1.5mm Figure 11-201 2. Adjusting the Image Leading Edge Non-Image Width (registration) Select ‘REGIST’ in service mode ( ] 3 ] ). Make adjustments so that the image leading edge margin is 4.5 ±1.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 3. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration (left/right front deck paper deck, cassette) Make adjustments by moving the horizontal registration adjusting plate of each left/right paper deck/cassette so that the edge-to-edge distance between the copy image and the copy paper is 0 ±1.5 mm. (-) (+) 0±1.5mm 0 2 4 6 8 10 Figure 11-203 a. Left/Right Front Paper Deck Adjusting plate Screw Figure 11-204a Adjusting plate Screw Figure 11-204b 11-6 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING b. Cassette Adjusting Plate Screw Figure 11-205 3-1.Adjusting the Left/Right Registration (paper deck-A1) 1) Make a copy of the Test Sheet, and check to make sure that the left/right registration between copy image and paper deck is 0 ±1.5 mm or less. 2) If the left/right registration is not as specified, adjust the position of the latch plate of the deck opening solenoid by turning the two adjusting screws. (At this time, use the scale on the latch plate as a reference.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 4. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration (holding tray position; 2nd side of twosided/overlay copies) Loosen the two screws, and move the guide plate of the holding tray assembly so that the edge-to-edge distance between the copy image and the copy paper is 0 ±2.0 mm in Direct. (-) (+) 0±2.0mm 0 2 4 6 8 10 Figure 11-206 5. Adjusting the Left/Right Margin Make adjustments so that the image left/right margin is 2.75 ±2.5 mm when the Test Sheet is copied in Direct.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 6. 1) 2) 3) Executing AE Automatic Adjustment Open the front door, and insert the door switch actuator into the door switch actuator. Push the service mode switch over the cover. Select the following in service mode: AE_ADJ:0 ← (]: START) (0: F5, 1:F9). 4) Place the Test Sheet on the copyboard, and close the copyboard cover. Butted. NA-3 Test Sheet Figure 11-207 5) Press the user mode key ] once. • The scanning lamp turns on, and auto adjustment is executed.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 7. Adjusting the AE Slope After executing AE auto adjustment, make a copy of a newspaper (or a rather dark original). If the copy is foggy or too light, perform the following: 1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch actuator into the door switch assembly. 2) Press the service mode switch over the cover with a clip. 3) Select ‘AE_SLOP’ in service mode ( ] 3 ] ). 4) Place a newspaper (or a relatively dark original) on the copyboard.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING B. Exposure System 1. Adjusting the Scanner Home Position After making copies, remove the control panel, and check to make sure that the line in section A on the electrode mount (front) of the No. 1 mirror mount is in section B of the hole of the glass support (front). Otherwise, change the setting of ‘BRAKE_SC’ in service mode ( ] 3 ] ) so that the line in section A is within section B. Electrode (front) No.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 2. Routing the Scanner Drive Cable Route the cable as indicated (q through i), and adjust the tension of the cable and the position of the mirror. 1 2 6 3 Steel ball 2 4 Wind eight times. 6 8 Fix in place temporaily. 7 5 Figure 11-209 11-12 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 3. Orientation of the Heat Absorbing Glass When replacing the heat absorbing glass, make sure that the white paint marking is toward the rear of the machine. White paint (rear) (front) Figure 11-210 4. 1) 2) 3) Adjusting the Tension of the Scanning Lamp Cable Remove the two mounting screws, and remove the left cover. Loosen the fixing screw on the tension spring bracket. Turn the tension adjusting screw so that the reading is as indicated.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 5. Adjusting the Position of the Mirror You must always adjust the position of the mirror whenever you have installed the scanner drive cable. 1) Move the No. 1 mirror mount and the No. 2/No. 3 mirror to the left. 2) Set the mirror positioning tool (front, rear; FY9-3011) as shown. Figure 11-212 Figure 11-213 11-14 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 6. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Cleaning the Mirror (No. 5 mirror) Remove the copyboard glass. Remove the lens hood. Remove the mirror guide plate. Move the lens stage in the direction of Enlarge. Remove the screw, and remove the mirror cleaning tool. While butting the mirror cleaning tool q against the No. 5 mirror as shown, clean the mirror by moving the tool in the direction of the arrow. At this time, be sure that your finger or the cleaning tool will not touch the No. 4 mirror.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 8. Routing the Lens X Direction Drive Belt Fix the lens X direction drive motor q with the mounting screw w where the motor has lowered on its own weight. q w Own weight Figure 11-216 9. 1) 2) 3) Adjusting the Position of the Scanner Locking Solenoid (SL1) Remove the rear cover. Remove the multifeeder assembly. (See Chapter 5.) Adjust the stroke of the scanner locking solenoid as indicated. E-ring Standards (10.5 ±0.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING C. Image Formation System 1. Grid Wire of the Primary Charging Assembly 1) Loosen the two mounting screws used to fix the left /right shielding plate in place. 2) Loosen the three mounting screws used to fix the motor unit in place at the front. Screws Figure 11-218 3) Loosen the mounting screw, and move the assembly in the direction indicated in Figure 11-219; then, fix it in place temporarily.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 6) Hook the loop on the stud A shown in Figure 11-220. Stud A Screw B Figure 11-220 7) After routing the wire for 31 runs, lead it through section B, give it a 1/2 turn, lead it between washer and motor unit, wind it once around the mounting screw clockwise, and fix it in place with the mounting screw. 8) Cut the excess charging wire with a nipper. 9) Tighten the mounting screw loosened in step 8). Take care to avoid deformation (slack) of the charging assembly.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 2. Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire Charging assembly Height of charging wire Tolerance Primary ±1mm 7.5+1.5 -0mm 7.5+1.5 -0mm No adjusting mechanism Pre-transfer 9.5+1.0 -0mm Transfer 10.2±0.5mm ±2mm Separation ±2mm A B A:16.2±0.5mm B:14.9±0.5mm Table 11-201 Reference: You can adjust the height (position) of the primary, transfer/separation charging wire by turning the screw behind the charging assembly.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 3. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Adjusting the Position of the Blanking Exposure Lamp Place the Test Sheet on the copyboard. Select A4 copy paper. Make a copy, and check that the left/right registration is correct. Make a copy in Direct. Check the image, and measure the non-image width shown in Figure 11-221. Standard Paper Left/right non-image width (W1) All sizes 2.75 ± 2.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 4. Position of the Roller Electrode Roller electrode Scraper Figure 11-223 Side seal Attachment reference 5. Adjusting the Position of the Cleaning Assembly Side Seal Be sure that the side seal does not protrude inside the cleaner housing. Figure 11-224 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 6. Cleaning the Cleaner Side Scraper Perform the following steps whenever you have replaced the cleaning blade (every 500,000 copies). 1) Remove the cleaning blade. 2) Remove the paper lint collecting at the tip of the side scraper (gap A between magnet roller and toner guide roller) with tweezers. 3) Remove the toner coated on the surface of the magnet roller. (Shape copy paper into the letter U, and scoop up the toner.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 4) Turn the magnet roller clockwise (viewing it from the front). 5) When the area cleaned in step 3) has taken on a new coating, repeat steps 3) through 5). COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING D. Pick-Up/Feeding System 1. Orientation of the Cassette/Front Paper Deck Pick-Up Roller Install the pick-up roller by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in mind: • The pick-up roller at the front and the one at the rear are not interchangeable. • The collar of the pick-up roller at the front is gold.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 2. Orientation of the Cassette/Front Paper Deck Separation Roller Keep the following in mind when replacing the separation roller. Wider groove Narrower groove (rear of copier) (front of copier) Figure 11-227 3. Orientation of the Feeding Roller (cassette/front paper deck) When installing the feeding roller assembly q of the cassette/deck pick-up assembly, be sure that the belt pulley w is toward the front.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 4. Orientation of the Multifeeder Pick-Up Roller 4-1Orientation of the Paper Deck-A1 Pick-Up Roller Install the pick-up roller by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in mind: • The pick-up roller at the front and the rear are not interchangeable. • The collar of the pick-up roller at the front is silver. When installing the pick-up roller q to the pick-up assembly, be sure that the round marking w on the collar (silver) faces the front.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 5. Rotation of the Multifeeder Feeding Roller When installing the pick-up roller q to the multifeeder pick-up assembly, be sure that the belt pulley w is toward the rear. When installing the feeding roller e to the feeding roller shaft r, make sure that the marking “5” t faces the front.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 6. Adjusting the Separation Roller Pressure of the Cassette/Front Paper Deck If double feeding or pick-up failure occurs during pick-up, adjust the position of the separation roller pressure spring. • If double feeding occurs, move the spring in the direction of arrow B. • If pick-up failure occurs, move the spring in the direction of arrow A. q w A e B r q Feeding roller w Separation roller e Locking lever r Pressure spring Figure 11-231 11-28 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 7. Adjusting the Separation Roller Pressure of the Holding Tray Turn the separation adjusting roll so that the shaft distance to the separation belt is 32.7 ±0.1 mm. 32.7±0.1mm Figure 11-232 8. Pick-Up/Feeding Roller of the Multifeeder If double feeding or pick-up failure occurs during pick-up, adjust the position of the pressure spring of the separation roller. • If double feeding occurs, move the spring in the direction of arrow A.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 9. Adjusting the Position of the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid (cassette) Turn the screw to adjust so that the distance of the bottom edge of the A roller support plate bushing from the bottom face of the pick-up unit of each holder is 36 ±0.5 mm when the plunger of the pick-up roller releasing solenoid is pulled as shown. 36±0.5 mm q A Figure 11-234 11-30 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 9-1Adjusting the Position of the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid (front paper deck) Adjust the position of the solenoid so that the left edge of the right solenoid arm 2 is 57.2 ±0.5 mm from the center of the solenoid mount as shown in Figure 11-226. A 57.2±0.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 10. Adjusting the Position of the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid (multifeeder) Slide the solenoid in the direction of A so that the gap between the shutter q and the shutter plate w is 0.4 ±0.2 mm when the solenoid is pulled. A q w 0.4±0.2mm 0.4±0.2mm Figure 11-235 Figure 11-235a 11-32 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
, CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11. Routing the Timing Belt of the Side Guide (multifeeder assembly) Butt the rack plate of the multifeeder against section A (open condition). Move the slide volume in the direction of B, and attach the timing belt on the pulley. Timing belt Pulley Rack plate Pulley Section A B Slide volume Figure 11-236 12.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 13. Adjusting the Position of the Holding Tray Paper Deflecting Plate Drive Solenoid Install the solenoid so that its stroke (end-to-end distance between rubber silencer and solenoid) is 5.0 ±0.3 mm. 5.0± 0.3m m Figure 11-238 14. Adjusting the Position of the Holding Tray Assembly Side Guide Plate Mark the position of the side guide plate with a pencil in advance, and install it with reference to the marking. Figure 11-239 11-34 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 15. Adjusting the Position of the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Plate Mark the position of the holding tray paper jogging plate in advance, and install it with reference to the marking. Figure 11-240 16. Adjusting the Timing Belt of the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Guide Plate Butt the rack plate of the paper jogging guide plate against section A (open state). Then, attach the timing belt to the pulley. A Figure 11-241 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 17. Adjusting the Position of the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Plate Solenoid Install the solenoid so that its stroke (end-to-end distance between rubber silencer and solenoid) is 1.5 ±0.3 mm. 1.5±0.3mm Figure 11-242 18. Drive Belt Route the drive belt on the pulley and the roller as shown. Drum drive belt Main motor Registration feeding drive belt Fixing/waste toner drive belt Figure 11-243 11-36 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Pick-up motor Holding tray drive belt Pick-up drive belt Figure 11-244 Caution: When installing the holding drive belt, be sure to attach the holding tray drive belt on the pulley at the bottom (inside when viewing form the rear) and to attach the pick-up drive belt on the pulley at the top (outside when viewing from the rear). COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING E. Fixing System 1. Points to Note When Installing the Fixing Heater 1) Do not touch the surface of the heater. 2) For both heaters, install them with the side with the longer heater wire toward the front. 3) Install the main heater (790 W) on the right and the sub heater (410 W) on the left (viewing from the front). 4) Connect the heater wire on the right to the main heater and the one at the top to the sub heater (when viewing from the rear). 2.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING nHeight of the Fixing Inlet Guide (dimensions indicate center of inlet guide) (upper roller) Inlet guide 59.7mm+/-0.1 62.9mm+/-0.1 high position (lower roller) nHeight of the Fixing Inlet Guide (dimensions indicate center of inlet guide) b a (front) a Inlet guide a-b 0.5mm (rear) b Fixing assembly bottom plate Figure 11-245 Caution: Do not loosen the mounting screw on the inlet guide mount.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 3. Adjusting the Lower Roller Pressure (nip) The nip width must be as indicated in Table 11-203. Otherwise, adjust it by turning the pressure adjusting nut. c b A3 paper Feeding direction Center of paper a Figure 11-246 Note: a and c represent points 10 mm from both ends of copy paper. Dimensions b |a-c| Measurement* 7.3±0.5mm 0.5 mm or less *Take measurements when both upper and lower rollers are adequately warm. Table 11-203 a.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Reference: The paper is discharged halfway out. It is then discharged in about 20 sec. 5) Measure the nip. 4. Adjusting the Fixing Clutch If you have replaced any parts that make up the following, adjust the set screw e so that the distance between 41T gear q and the control ring w is 0.1 to 0.3 mm (about 4 sheets of plain paper 64 g/m2). w q e Figure 11-247 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING F. Electrical System 1. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) When Replacing the DC Controller PCB Install the new DC controller PCB. Press the service mode switch with a clip over the cover. Select the following in service mode ( ] 4 ] ): ‘RAM_INIT’:0 ← (]: START) Press the user mode key ]. Execute AE adjustment. Enter the values indicated on the label attached behind the front door. Enter the settings suited to the user in service mode ( ] 5 ] ). Press the Reset key twice. 2.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 3) Press the user mode key ]. • Non-auto control mode starts. NIP : 0 ← (] : START) PO_CONT : 1 ← (] : START) 4) Press the Reset key twice. Caution: When non-auto control mode is executed, all control (corona current, intensity, developing bias) is set to default settings stored in ROM. w Using Non-Auto Control Mode Use non-auto control mode to find out if a fault, if any, is on the input or the output side of the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB. c.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING q 1) 2) 3) Method 1 Turn off the power switch. Short J127-1 and -2 on the DC controller PCB, and disconnect J103. Set the door switch actuator into the door switch assembly, and turn on the power switch. 4) Start service mode ( ] 2 ] ), and check that the indication of address P023 during initial rotation (hexa decimal analog value) is between ‘0003’ and ‘0001B’. If not between ‘0003’ and ‘0001B’, suspect a fault on the DC controller PCB.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Cover Figure 11-249 Caution: Set the clip fully away from the sensor cover and the sensor window so that it will never come into contact with them. 5) Connect the cable of the potential sensor checking electrode to the Support metal plate (GND) of the potential measurement PCB. 6) Insert the door switch actuator into the door assembly. 7) Turn on the power switch. Caution: Do not touch the potential sensor once you have turned on the power switch.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11-46 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
Checking the Potential System START Select non-potential mode. ( 4 ; * * 'PO.CONT' '1') Has the image improved? Is the toner image on the photosensitive drum before transfer normal? A B Select potential control mode. ( * 4 * ; 'PO.CONT' '0') NO Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.com 3. Turn on the power switch. NO YES Select non-potential control mode. ( * 4 * .
A B Select the primary power supply limit notation. ( * 1 * ; 'PLMT') Select Direct mode and 'GLEAM-5' in service mode ( 3 ) . * * Is 'PLMY' '1'? Select potential control.( * 1 * ; 'PO.CONT' '0') NO Measure the voltage during copying between J114A-2 and A13 on the DC controller PCB. (step (developing bias DC component) YES Does the voltage vary between 0.5 and 4 V during copying according to the input of 'GLAM-5'?* NO Replace the DC controller PCB.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 4. Potential Control System Conversion Table Control (V) Primary (µA) Developing bias (V) Pre-transfer (µA) Transfer (µA) Separation (µA) 3.00 1,400 0 0 440 100 3.05 1,391 3 –2 437 96 3.10 1,382 7 –4 434 92 3.15 1,373 11 –6 431 88 3.20 1,365 15 –8 429 85 3.25 1,356 18 –10 426 81 3.30 1,347 22 –12 426 77 3.35 1,338 26 –14 420 73 3.40 1,330 30 –16 418 70 3.45 1,321 33 –18 415 66 3.50 1,312 37 –20 412 62 3.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Control (V) Primary (µA) Developing bias (V) Pre-transfer (µA) Transfer (µA) Separation (µA) 4.65 1,111 123 –68 349 –23 4.70 1,102 127 –70 346 –27 4.75 1,093 131 –72 343 –31 4.80 1,085 135 –74 341 –35 4.85 1,076 138 –76 338 –38 4.90 1,067 142 –78 335 –42 4.95 1,058 146 –80 332 –46 5.00 1,050 150 –82 330 –50 5.05 1,041 153 –84 327 –53 5.10 1,032 157 –86 324 –57 5.15 1,023 161 –88 321 –61 5.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Control (V) Primary (µA) Developing bias (V) Pre-transfer (µA) Transfer (µA) Separation (µA) 6.35 813 251 –138 255 –151 6.40 805 255 –140 253 –155 6.45 796 258 –142 250 –158 6.50 787 262 –144 247 –162 6.55 778 266 –146 244 –166 6.60 770 270 –148 242 –170 6.65 761 273 –150 239 –173 6.70 752 277 –152 236 –177 6.75 743 281 –154 233 –181 6.80 735 285 –156 231 –185 6.85 726 288 –158 228 –188 6.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Control (V) Primary (µA) Developing bias (V) Pre-transfer (µA) Transfer (µA) Separation (µA) 8.05 516 378 –208 162 –278 8.10 507 382 –210 159 –282 8.15 498 386 –212 156 –286 8.20 490 390 –214 154 –290 8.25 481 393 –216 151 –293 8.30 472 397 –218 148 –297 8.35 463 401 –220 145 –301 8.40 455 405 –222 143 –305 8.45 446 408 –224 140 –308 8.50 437 412 –226 137 –312 8.55 428 416 –228 134 –316 8.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Control (V) Primary (µA) Developing bias (V) Pre-transfer (µA) Transfer (µA) Separation (µA) 9.75 218 506 –278 68 –406 9.80 210 510 –280 66 –410 9.85 201 513 –282 63 –413 9.90 192 517 –284 60 –417 9.95 183 521 –286 57 –421 10.00 175 525 –288 55 –425 10.05 166 528 –290 52 –428 10.10 157 532 –292 49 –432 10.15 148 536 –294 46 –436 10.20 140 540 –297 44 –440 10.25 131 543 –299 41 –443 10.
5. Checking the Environment Sensor 1) Start service mode ( ] 1 ] ), and take notes of the readings of temperature and humidity on the control panel display. Data A ‘RTMP’ °C ......Data A1 ‘RHUM’ % ......Data A2 2) Press the Reset key twice, and turn off the power switch. 3) Remove the environment sensor, and insert the environment sensor jig (FY9-3014) in its place. 4) Turn on the power switch, and leave the machine alone for 5 min.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 6. Checking the Photointerrupters You can check the machine’s photointerrupters either with a conventional meter or the machine’s service mode. a. 1) 2) 3) 4) Using a Tester Set the meter to the 30VDC range. Connect the – probe of the meter to GND on the DC controller PCB. Connect the + probe to the terminals (DC controller PCB) shown in the table. Make checks as instructed. b.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Connector No.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Sensor Connector No. Checks *2* address PS10 J108B-7 External delivery sensor P005-04 PS11 J108A-13 Fixing cleaning belt length sensor P005-05 PS12 J108B-12 Internal delivery sensor P005-02 PS14 113A-3 Holding tray registration paper sensor P005-07 PS15 J113B-10 Holding tray inlet paper sensor P005-06 PS17 J113B-11 Holding tray pick-up sensor P005-09 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Connector No. Sensor Checks *2* address PS19 J113B-6 Holding tray re-circulating bar HP sensor P005-10 PS20 J113A-10 Holding tray YHP sensor P100-03 PS21 J113B-1 Holding tray XHP sensor P100-02 PS22 J115B-7 Multifeeder paper sensor P002-05 PS23 J108A-7 Registration paper sensor P002-02 PS24 J116B-2 Pick-up vertical path 0 sensor P002-00 11-58 *2* notation Voltage Insert paper in the detecting lever assembly of PS19 while in standby.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Sensor Connector No. Checks *2* address PS25 J117A-4 Cassette 3 lifter position sensor P008-08 PS26 J117A-7 Cassette 3 paper sensor P008-06 PS27 J117B-4 Pick-up vertical path 3 paper sensor P008-04 PS28 J130A-4 Cassette 4 lifter position sensor P008-09 PS29 J130B-7 Cassette 4 paper sensor P008-07 PS30 J130B-4 Pick-up vertical path 4 sensor P008-05 PS31 J116A-4 Right deck lifter position sensor P005-08 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Connector No.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Sensor Connector No. Checks *2* address PS39 Left deck limit sensor J121B-2 ———— PS40 J116B-8 Left deck open/closed sensor P007-04 PS41 J119B-4 Upper right door sensor P007-00 PS42 J119B-7 Upper right door sensor P007-01 PS46 J105A-9 Multifeeder door sensor P005-03 PS47 J108B-4 Fixing assembly outlet paper sensor P005-08 PS48 J114A-14 Scanner locked sensor P009-03 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Connector No. Sensor Checks *2* address PS49 J121B-5 Left deck outlet paper sensor P009-04 PS50 J117B-7 Cassette 3 open/closed sensor P009-05 PS51 J130B-7 Cassette 4 open/closed sensor P009-06 PS52 J108A-19 Claw jam sensor P009-01 PS53 J108A-2 Fixing/feeding assembly unit sensor P005-01 *2* notation Voltage Move the detecting lever by hand while in standby. When the lightblocking plate is at PS49. 1 5V When the lightblocking plate is not at PS49.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 7. Registering the Paper Width Basic Value (] ]4] ]; cassette/multifeeder) Perform the steps that follow whenever you have • replaced the machine’s paper width detecting VR (including the multifeeder); or • adjusted the front/rear registration of the cassette. For each cassette, 3 and 4, you must work on ‘STMTR’ and ‘A4R’; for the multifeeder, you must work on ‘A6R’, ‘A4R’, and ‘A4’. a.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING III. IMAGE FAULTS A. Initial Checks 1. Checking the Site Environment Make sure of the following: a. The voltage of the power source is the rating ±10%. (The power plug must not be disconnected at night.) b. The machine is not near areas of high temperature/humidity (near water faucets, water boilers, humidifiers, and sources of fire), and it is not in a cold or dusty place. c. The machine is not in a place exposed to ammonium gas. d.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 3. Checking the Copyboard Cover, Copyboard Glass, and Standard White Plate Check the copyboard cover, copyboard glass, and standard white plate for dirt and scratches. If dirt is found, clean them with solution of mild detergent or alcohol; if scratches are found, replace them. 4. Checking the Charging Assemblies a. Check each charging assembly for dirt and faults on its charging wire (scratches, etc.). b. Clean the charging wire of each charging assembly.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Caution: If the copy has an uneven density (between front) or is too light or foggy, perform the “Image Adjustment Basic Procedure” before consulting the troubleshooting tables. 11-66 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING B. Sample Image Faults not available 11-68 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING C. Troubleshooting Image Faults 1. The copy is too light (halftone only). Cause Step Checks Action YES/NO 1 Perform the Image Adjustment Basic Procedure. Is the problem corrected? YES End. Scanner 2 Clean the standard white plate, mirror, lens, and dust-proofing glass. Is the problem corrected? YES End. Developing assembly 3 Are the rolls of the developing assembly in firm contact with the drum during copying? NO Check the developing assembly locking lever.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 2. The copy is too light (including solid black). 3. The copy is too light (entire face). Cause Step Checks Action YES/NO Perform the Image Adjustment Basic Procedure. Is the problem corrected? YES End. 2 Turn off the power switch during copying, and open the front door. Is the toner image on the surface of the photosensitive drum before transfer more or less normal? NO Go to step 7.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Cause 7 Transfer Lower transfer guide/varistor Step Checks Measure the resistance between the PCBs (metal sections) of the lower transfer guide and the feeding assembly. Is it 0 ? Development DC controller PCB Developing assembly Pre-transfer charging assembly Potential control, Photosensitive drum YES/NO Action YES 1. Check to see if the transfer guide should be in contact with the side plate of the feeding assembly (metal section). 2. Replace the varistor.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 4. The copy has an uneven density (darker at front). 5. The copy has an uneven density (lighter at front). Step Cause Checks Action YES/NO Primary charging wire 1 Perform the Image Adjustment Basic Procedure. Is the problem corrected? YES End. Developing assembly 2 Are the developing rolls of the developing assembly firmly in contact with the photosensitive drum? NO Check the developing assembly locking unit.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 6. The copy is foggy. (overall) Cause Step Checks Action YES/NO LIGHT_5 1 Perform the Image Adjustment Basic Procedure. Is the problem corrected? YES End. Scanner 2 Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting plate, side reflecting plate, mirror, lens, dust-proofing glass, and heat absorbing glass. Is the problem corrected? YES End. Cleaner assembly 3 Is the cleaning blade installed correctly? NO Install the cleaning blade.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 7. The copy has vertical fogging. 8. The copy has black lines (vertical, fuzzy, thick). Step Checks YES/NO Primary charging assembly 1 Clean the charging wire, grid wire, and shielding plate. Is the problem corrected? YES End. Scanner system 2 Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting plate, side reflecting plate, lens, mirror, dust-proofing glass, and heat absorbing glass. Is the problem corrected? YES End. Pre-exposure lamp 3 Clean the pre-exposure lamp.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 9. The copy has black lines (vertical, fine). Cause Copyboard glass Photosensitive drum cleaner assembly Photosensitive drum Step Checks Action 1 Dese the problem occur only in stream reading mode? YES Check the copyboard glass for dirt and scratches at the point where the scanner is fixed in position in stream reading mode. 2 Press the Copy Start key, and turn off the power switch when copy paper is in the feeding assembly.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 10. The copy has white spots (vertical). 11. The copy has white lines (vertical). Cause Step Checks YES/NO Action Fixing assembly 1 Press the Copy Start key while keeping the copyboard cover open, and turn off the power switch while copy paper is moving through the feeding assembly. At this time, does the copy image before moving through the fixing assembly have white spots or white lines? NO 1. Clean the inlet (upper, lower) of the fixing assembly. 2.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Cause Step Checks YES/NO Action Transfer/ separation charging assembly, Pre-transfer charging assembly 6 Are the separation claws of the cleaner assembly in contact with copy paper while the copy paper is being fed? YES 1. Clean the pre-transfer charging assembly and the transfer/separation charging assembly. If the dirt cannot be removed, replace the charging wire. 2. Try replacing the copy paper. 3. Select ‘FUZZY’ in service mode ( ] 5 ] ), and set it to ‘3’.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 12. The copy has white spots (horizontal). Step Cause Checks YES/NO Action Developing assembly 1 Is the problem noted at intervals of about 52 mm? YES 1. Clean the developing rolls. 2. Dry wipe the surface of the developing cylinder. 3. If the surface of the developing cylinder have scratches, replace the developing cylinder. Drum 2 Is the problem noted at intervals of about 25 cm? YES 1. Clean the drum. 2. If scratches are found, replace the drum.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 13. The copy has a soiled back. Cause Developing assembly Step Checks YES/NO 1 Turn off the power switch while copy paper is moving through the feeding assembly. At this time, is the back of the paper soiled? NO Go to step 3. 2 Does the problem occur at intervals of about 52 mm? YES 1. Clean the registration roller. 2. Clean the transfer guide. 3. Check the developing assembly for leakage of toner. NO 1. Clean the feeding assembly. 2.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Fixing assembly 14. The copy has fixing faults. Action Cause Step Checks YES/NO Upper roller, Lower roller 1 Does the problem occur in vertical direction? YES Check the upper roller and the lower roller for scratches. Heater (H1, H2) 2 Does the heater (H1, H2) turn on immediately after power-on? NO See “The heater fails to turn on.” Lower roller pressure 3 Is the lower roller pressure (nip) as specified? NO Adjust the lower roller pressure.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 15., 16., 17. The copy has displaced leading edge registration. Cause Step Checks Action YES/NO Original 1 Is the original placed correctly? NO Place it correctly. Copy paper 2 Is the paper of a type recommended by Canon? NO Try recommended paper. If the results are good, advise the user to use recommended paper. 3 Make copies using the paper deck and each of the cassettes. Is the problem noted on all copies? YES Go to step 4. NO Check each pick-up system.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 18. The copy is blurred and fuzzy. Step Cause Checks YES/NO Action Scanner drive cable 1 Is the cable overlapping on the cable pulley while the scanner is moving, or is the cable too slack or taut? YES 1. Route the cable once again. 2. If cable is twisted or frayed, replace it. Scanner rail 2 Move the No. 1 mirror mount by hand. Does it move smoothly? NO Clean the surface of the scanner rail with alcohol. Thereafter, apply a small amount of lubricant.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 19. The copy has horizontal fogging. Action Step Checks YES/NO 1 Does the problem occur at the same location on all copies made in Direct? YES Go to step 3. Scanning lamp, Lamp regulator 2 Does the scanning lamp flicker while the scanner is moving forward? YES Check the scanning lamp and the lamp regulator. Scanner 3 Make reduced copies, and compare it against ones made in Direct. Are the positions of the problem different? NO Check the scanning system.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 21. The copy is blank. Step Cause Checks YES/NO Action Primary charging assembly 1 Is the primary charging assembly set securely? NO Set the charging assembly. 2 Is the charging wire or the grid wire broken? YES String the charging wire and the grid wire newly. Developing assembly 3 Is the developing assembly in firm contact with the drum? NO Check the developing assembly locking lever.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING IV. TROUBLESHOOTING MALFUNCTIONS A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions Caution: Whenever installing/removing any sensor, pay attention to the orientation/position of the spring used to lock down the detecting lever in position. 1. E000 Cause Sub thermistor (TH2) Step Checks YES/NO Action 1 Clear ‘E000’. Turn off and then on the power switch.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Cause Step Checks YES/NO Action Environment 6 Does the problem occur only when the machine is turned on for the first time in the morning? YES •Advise the user that the site is out of specification. •Advise the user not to turn on the machine until the room is warm enough. Main thermistor (TH1) 7 Replace the thermistor. Is the problem corrected? YES End. NO Replace the DC controller PCB. DC controller PCB 2.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 3. E002 4. E003 Cause Step Checks YES/NO 1 Execute ‘ERROR’ in service mode ( ] 4 ] ), and turn on the power once again. Is either of the following correct? •The fixing heater fails to turn on. •‘E002’ or ‘E003’ is indicated. YES Go to the appropriate section.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 6. E005 Cause Step Fixing cleaning belt 1 Is the web of the fixing assembly taken up? YES Replace the cleaning belt. Cleaning belt detecting lever 2 Is the position of the cleaning belt detecting lever correct? NO Correct the position of the lever. Fixing/feeding unit 3 Is the fixing/feeding unit set in the machine correctly? YES The connector at the rear of the fixing/feeding unit may have poor contact; make a check.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 9. E013 Cause Step Checks YES/NO Action Waste toner feeding screw (locked) 1 Is the waste toner feeding screw drive gear pushing the waste toner feeding screw locked detecting switch (SW4)? YES The feeding screw inside the waste toner pipe is locked for some reason. Remove the waste toner pipe, and try turing the screw by hand. If it can be rotated easily, install it and see if the problem has been corrected; otherwise, replace the waste toner pipe, and remove the cause.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 10. E015 Step Checks YES/NO Action Power supply (motor controller PCB is integrated with pick-up motor) 1 Set the meter to the 200VDC range, and connect the + probe to J612-3 and the – probe to J612-4 on the DC controller PCB. Is the voltage about 12 V? NO Check the wiring from the DC power supply PCB to the motor controller PCB; if normal, replace the DC power supply PCB.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11. E020 Step Checks YES/NO 1 Remove the upper cover of the developing assembly. Is the developing assembly almost overflowing with toner? (After the check, be sure to install the upper cover.) YES Go to step 6. 2 Is the hopper full of toner? NO Go to step 5. Hopper assembly sensor 3 Select ‘P002’ in service mode ( ] 2 ] ). Is bit 10 (TEP) of the message display ‘0’ (toner absent)? YES Replace the hopper assembly sensor.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 12. E030 (The total copy counter fails to turn on.) Step Cause Checks YES/NO Action Total copy counter 1 Turn off the power switch, and disconnect J104 from the DC controller. Set the meter to the × 1K range, and measure the resistance between J104B-2 and J104B-1. Is it about 500 ? NO Check the wiring from the DC controller PCB to the total copy counter; if normal, replace the total copy counter.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 14. E043 (Paper deck-A1) Cause Side deck driver PCB Deck main motor (M101) Action Step Checks YES/NO 1 Is there electrical continuity between the following connectors on the side deck drive PCB? NO Replace the side deck driver PCB. YES End. NO Check the harness from the DC controller PCB to the motor; if normal, replace the DC controller PCB. 2 DC controller PCB COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 15. E050 Step Cause Checks YES/NO Action Holding tray X home position sensor (PS21) 1 Is the holding tray X home position sensor (PS21) normal? NO Replace the sensor (PS21). Holding tray X motor (M8) 2 Disconnect J209 from the holding tray driver PCB. Is there electrical continuity between the following pins on the motor side? J209-1 and -2 J209-5 and -6 NO Replace the holding tray X motor (M8). Holding tray driver PCB 3 Replace the holding tray driver PCB.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 17. E202 (The keys on the control panel are locked.) Cause Scanner home position sensor (PS1) Step Checks YES/NO Action 1 Is the scanner at home position when E202 turns on? NO See “The scanner fails to rotate.” 2 Is the scanner home position sensor (PS1) normal? (See the instructions on how to check photointerrupters.) YES Check the wiring from the DC controller to PS1; if normal, replace the sensor PS1. NO Replace the DC controller PCB. DC controller PCB 18.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 20. E210 (fault in lens X direction drive system) 21. E212 (fault in lens Y direction drive system) Cause Lens X home position sensor (PS6) Step Checks YES/NO 1 Does the lens move in X/Y direction when the power switch is turned on? NO See “The lens fails to move.” 2 Is the lens X/Y home position sensor (PS6/7) normal? (See the instructions on how to check photointerrupters.) NO Check the wiring from the DC controller PCB to PS6; if normal, replace PS6.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 24. E243 Step Checks YES/NO DC controller PCB 1 Turn on and off the power switch. Is the problem corrected? YES End. NO Replace the DC controller PCB. Control panel PCB 2 Replace the control panel PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES End. Step Checks YES/NO 1 Turn on and off the power switch. Is the problem corrected? YES End. NO Replace the DC controller PCB. Checks YES/NO Cause Action 25. E710/E711 Cause Malfunction DC controller PCB Action 26.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 28. E800 Cause Step Checks Action YES/NO Malfunction 1 Turn off and then on the power switch. Is the problem corrected? YES End. J716 2 Is the relay connector J716 under the power switch (SW1) connected securely? NO Connect it securely. Power switch (SW1) 3 Set the meter to the × 1Ω range. Disconnect the relay connector J716, and connect the probe of the meter to the connector terminal on the power switch side.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 30. AC power is absent. Step Checks YES/NO Action Power plug 1 Is the power plug connected to the power outlet? NO Connect the power plug. Power source 2 Is the rated AC voltage present at the power source? NO The problem is not the machine’s. Advise the user. 3 Is the rated voltage present between J301-1 and J301-5, between J301-3 and J301-5, and between J302-1 and J302-3? (J301 and J302 are in the power supply unit.) YES End.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 31. DC power supply is absent. Step Cause AC power supply Wiring, DC load Checks 1 Is the specified voltage present between J301-1 and J301-5, between J301-3 and J301-5, and between J302-1 and J302-3? (J301 and J302 are in the DC power supply unit.) NO See “AC power is absent.” 2 Has the fuse (FU51, FU1) on the DC power supply blown? YES Remove the cause, and replace the fuse. 3 Turn off the power switch, and disconnect the power plug.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 32. Pick-up fails. (deck pick-up; front paper deck + cassette) Cause Step Checks YES/NO Action Upper right door, Lower right door 1 Are the upper right door and the lower right door closed securely? NO Close the door securely. Lifter 2 Slide out the deck from the machine. Does the lifter move down? Set the deck. Is the sound of the lifter moving up heard? NO See “The lifter fails to move up.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 33. The deck lifter fails to move up. (front paper deck + cassette) Cause Checks Step YES/NO Action Deck 1 Is the deck set correctly? NO Set the deck correctly. Lifter cable 2 Is the lifter cable routed correctly? NO Route the cable correctly. Spring, Lever 3 Push down the pick-up roller releasing lever with a finger. Does the pick-up roller move down? NO Remove the pick-up assembly, and check the spring and the lever.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 34. Pick-up fails. (cassette pick-up) Cause Step Checks YES/NO Action 1 Slide in and out the cassette. Is the sound of the lifter falling and the lifter motor turning heard? NO See “The lifter fails to move up.” Drive gear 2 Is the drive belt attached correctly? NO Attach the belt correctly. Upper right door, Lower right door 3 Are the upper right door and the lower right door fully closed? NO Close the doors.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Cause Pick-up clutch Step Checks YES/NO 8 Set the meter to the 30VDC range, and connect the probes of the meter to the connectors on the DC controller shown. Does the voltage change from 24 to 0 V when the Copy Start key is pressed? YES Check the wiring; if normal, replace the corresponding clutch. NO Replace the DC controller PCB. NO Check the wiring and the lever; if normal, replace the sensor. YES Remove the pick-up assembly, and check the spring.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 35. The lifter fails to move up. (cassette) Cause Step Checks YES/NO Action Cassette size detecting switch 1 Is the size of the cassette indicated on the message display? NO Check the cassette size detecting switch. Gear, Lever 2 Slide out the cassette, and move up the lifter by hand. Does it move smoothly? NO Remove the pick-up assembly, and check the gear and the lever.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 36. Pick-up fails. (multifeeder) Cause Step Pick-up roller, Pick-up/feeding roller, Separation roller 1 Is the orientation of the pick-up roller, pick-up/feeding roller, and separation roller correct? NO Install the rollers correctly. Belt, Gear, Coupling 2 Is the drive from the main motor transmitted to the multifeeder pickup assembly through the belt, gear, and coupling? NO Check the belt, gear, and coupling.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 37. The vertical path roller fails to rotate. Step Checks YES/NO Action Belt, Gear, Coupling 1 Is the drive from the pick-up motor (M2) transmitted to each vertical path roller through the belt, gear, and coupling? NO Install the belt, gear, and coupling correctly. Vertical path roller clutch 2 Connect the – probe of the tester to GND and the + probe to the terminal indicated.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 39. The scanner fails to move forward. Cause Step Checks YES/NO Action Cable 1 Is the scanner drive cable routed correctly? NO Route the cable correctly. Scanner path 2 Is the scanner rail free of dirt? Does the scanner move smoothly when pushed by hand? NO Is the surface of the scanner rail soiled? Is there foreign object that comes into contact with the scanner. As necessary, clean, lubricate, or correct.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 41. The blanking exposure lamp fails to turn on. Cause Step Checks YES/NO Action DC controller PCB 1 Remove the blanking exposure lamp, and connect the connector. Select ‘BLANK’ in service mode ( ] 4 ] ). Does the blanking exposure lamp turn on when the user mode key is pressed? YES Check the wiring from the blanking exposure lamp to the DC controller PCB; if normal, replace the DC controller PCB. Blanking exposure lamp 2 Replace the blanking exposure lamp.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 43. The scanning lamp fails to turn on. Step Checks YES/NO Action Connector 1 Select ‘SCAN LAMP’ in service mode ( ] 4 ] ). Does the scanner lamp remain on for 3 sec when the user mode key is pressed? YES The connector may have poor contact. Check the connector. Lamp (LA1) 2 Is the scanning lamp (LA1) installed correctly? NO Disconnect the power plug, and install the lamp correctly.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 44. The hopper motor (M10) fails to operate. Cause Step Checks YES/NO Action 1 Execute ‘HPPR_MTR’ in service mode ( ] 4 ] ). Does the hopper motor rotate? NO Go to step 3. Toner level detection circuit 2 Does bit 10 of ‘P002’ in service mode ( ] 4 ] ) indicate ‘0’ (toner absent)? YES If there is toner in the developing assembly, replace the toner detection PCB.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 45. The hopper motor (M11) fails to operate. Step Checks YES/NO 1 Does the hopper motor rotate when ‘HPPR_MTR’ is executed in service mode ( ] 4 ] )? NO Go to step 3. Toner level detection PCB 2 Does bit 10 of ‘P002’ in service mode ( ] 2 ] ) indicate '0' (toner absent)? YES If there is toner in the developing assembly, replace the toner level detection PCB.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 47. The lens fails to move. Step Checks YES/NO Action Rail 1 Turn off the power switch, and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet. Does the lens move smoothly when the pulley of the lens motor is moved by hand? NO Check the rail for foreign matter and dirt. Clean, as necessary. Drive belt 2 Is the drive belt attached correctly? NO Attach the belt correctly.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 48. The Add Toner indicator fails to turn on. Cause Toner sensor (hopper assembly), DC controller PCB Step Checks Action YES/NO 1 Is there toner in the hopper assembly? YES Go to step 3. 2 Select ‘P002’ in service mode ( ] 2 ] ). Move the toner around the toner sensor (TS1) to expose the sensor. Does bit 10 on the message display indicate ‘0’ (toner absent)? NO 1. Replace the toner sensor (TS1). 2. Replace the DC controller PCB. YES 1.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 50. The Set Control Card message fails to turn off. Cause Step Checks Action YES/NO CC-V 1 Can copies be made without setting a control card? YES Check the connector of the CC-V for a short circuit. Control panel 2 Replace the control panel. Is the message indicated? YES End. NO Replace the DC controller PCB. DC controller PCB 51. The Set Control Card message fails to turn off.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 54. The fixing heater fails to operate. Cause Step Checks YES/NO Thermal switch (TP1) 1 Slide out the fixing assembly, and connect the probes of the tester to both terminals of the thermal switch (TP1). Is there electrical continuity? NO Replace the thermal switch. Fixing heater (H1, H2) 2 Slide out the fixing assembly, and connect probes of the meter to both terminals of the fixing heater (H1, H2). Is there electrical continuity? NO Replace the fixing heater.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 55. Pick-up fails. (paper deck-A1) Cause Step Checks YES/NO Action Upper right door, Lower right door 1 Are the upper right door and the lower right door closed firmly? NO Close the doors. Lifter 2 Slide out the compartment from the deck. Does the lifter move down? Further, is the sound of the lifter moving up heard when the compartment is set? NO See “The lifter fails to move up.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 56. The deck lifter fails to move up. (paper deck-A1) Step Cause Checks YES/NO Action Paper deck -A1 1 Is the deck set correctly? NO Set the deck correctly. Lifter cable 2 Is the lifter cable routed correctly? NO Route the cable correctly. Spring, Lever 3 Push up the pick-up roller releasing lever with a finger. Does the pick-up roller move down? NO Remove the pick-up assembly, and check the spring lever.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING PROBLEMS # A. Copy Paper Jams Jams in the machine tend to occur in any of the following blocks: Pick-up assembly Separation/feeding assembly Fixing/delivery assembly Drum cleaner assembly Holding tray assembly Feeding assembly The troubleshooting procedures, therefore, are organized according to location. You can check the location and the type of jam using ‘B_JAM’ in service mode ( ] 1 ] ; eight most recent jams).
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 1. Pick-Up Assembly Step Checks YES/NO Action 1 Is the copy paper curled or wavy? YES Replace the paper. Advise the user on the correct method of storing paper. 2 Try Canon-recommended paper. Is the problem corrected? YES Advise the user on the correct method of storing paper. DC controller PCB, Pick-up clutch 3 Is the pick-up roller of the selected cassette, deck, or multifeeder rotating during copying? NO See the relevant section.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 2. Separation/Feeding Assembly Step Checks YES/NO Copy paper 1 Is the leading edge of copy paper past the registration roller? YES Go to step 5. Registration roller 2 Is the coupling of the registration roller engaged correctly? NO Set the fixing/feeding unit correctly. 3 Is the registration roller worn, deformed, or soiled? YES If dirt is found, clean it with alcohol; if wear or deformation is found, replace the part.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 3. Fixing/Delivery Assembly Action Step Delivery assembly separation claw 1 Is the separation claw worn or deformed? YES 1. Replace the separation claw. 2. If dirt is found, clean the part with solvent. Upper/lower roller 2 Is the upper/lower roller deformed or damaged? YES Replace the roller. Paper guide 3 Is the paper guide soiled with toner? YES Clean it with solvent. 4 Is the height of the paper guide correct? NO Adjust the height.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 5. Cleaning Assembly Cause Step Checks YES/NO Transfer/separa tion charging assembly, Pretransfer charging assembly 1 Are the transfer/separation charging assembly and the pre-transfer charging assembly set securely? NO Set the transfer/separation charging assembly securely. 2 Is the height of the charging wire as specified? NO Adjust the height of the charging wire.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 7. Holding Tray Assembly (re-pick up) Checks Step Cause Action YES/NO Holding tray separation clutch (CL6) 1 Is the holding tray separation clutch (CL6) normal? NO Replace the clutch (CL6). Holding tray repick up roller solenoid (SL6) 2 Is the holding tray re-pick up tray rotating? NO Replace the solenoid (SL6). Holding tray pick-up sensor (PS17) 3 Is the holding tray pick-up sensor (PS17) normal? NO Replace the sensor (PS17).
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 9. Holding Tray Feeding Assembly Cause Step Checks YES/NO Action 1 Is the holding tray feeding assembly set correctly? NO Set it correctly. Holding tray feeding clutch (CL1), Holding tray feeding clutch (CL2) 2 Does the paper move correctly inside the holding tray feeding assembly? NO Replace the clutch (CL1 or CL2).
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING B. Feeding Faults 1. Double Feeding Cause Step Separation roller 1 Checks Is the separation roller deformed or worn? Spring Action YES/NO YES Replace the separation roller. NO Replace the spring used to pull the separation roller. YES/NO Action 2. Wrinkles Cause Step Checks Pick-up assembly 1 Turn off the machine while copy paper is moving through the feeding assembly.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING VI. ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-127 Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING A. Sensors PS48 PS5 PS4 PS3 PS1 SVR1 PS7 PS22PS46 PS6 PS33 PS24 PS41 SVR2 SV1 PS36 SVR3 PS25 PS26 SV2 PS30 PS42 PS50 PS28 PS29 PS51 PS23 PS52 PS47 PS10 PS12 PS19 PS14 PS17 PS11 PS53 PS21 PS20 PS15 PS9 PS8 Figure 11-601 11-128 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Symbol Name Notation Function Photointerrupter PS1 PS3 PS4 PS5 PS6 PS7 PS8 PS9 PS10 PS11 PS12 PS14 PS15 PS17 PS19 PS20 PS21 PS22 PS23 PS24 PS25 PS26 PS27 PS28 PS29 PS30 PS33 PS36 PS41 PS42 PS46 PS47 PS48 PS50 PS51 PS52 PS53 Scanner home position detection Scanner original leading edge 1 detection Scanner original leading edge 2 detection Copyboard cover open/closed detection Lens X home position detection Lens Y home position detection Holding tray feeding assembly 1 paper
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING PS49 PS37 PS32 PS31 PS38 PS39 PS34 PS35 PS40 Figure 11-602 11-130 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Symbol Function Name Notation Photointerrupter PS31 Right deck lifter position detection PS32 Right deck paper detection PS34 Left deck lifter position detection PS35 Left deck paper detection PS37 Right deck lifter limit detection PS38 Right deck open/closed detection PS39 Left deck lifter limit detection PS40 Left deck open/closed detection PS49 Left deck pick-up assembly outlet paper detection Q Table 11-602 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING B. Swithes and Solenoids SL10 SL15 SW1 SW3 SL2 SW2 MSW5 SL14 SL9 SL7 SL8 SL1 SL6 MSW4 SL13 SL3 SL11 SL12 Figure 11-603 11-132 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Symbol S L Name Solenoid Microswitch/switch Notation Function SL1 Scanner locking SL2 Delivery paper deflecting plate drive SL3 Fixing drive SL6 Holding tray re-pick up roller (D-cut roller) drive SL7 Holding tray weight drive SL8 Holding tray paper deflecting plate drive SL9 Holding tray swinging SL10 Multifeeder pick-up SL11 Cassette 3 pick-up roller release SL12 Cassette 4 pick-up roller release SL13 Fixing/feeding unit locking SL14 Fixing cleaning
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING SL4 SL5 Figure 11-604 11-134 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Symbol S L Name Solenoid Function Notation SL4 Right deck pick-up roller release SL5 Left deck pick-up roller release Table 11-604 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-135 Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING C. Motors and Fans M3 M1 M11 M10 M4 M5 M12 M13 M2 M6 M7 M9 M8 M14 M15 FM8 FM5 FM7 FM3 FM6 FM2 Figure 11-605 11-136 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Symbol Name Fan M Motor Function Notation FM2 Exhaust fan FM3 Fixing heat discharge fan FM5 Developing fan FM6 Feeding fan FM7 Cleaner fan FM8 Scanner cooling fan M1 Main motor M2 Pick-up motor M3 Scanner motor M4 Lens X motor M5 Lens Y motor M6 Transfer/separation charging wire cleaning motor M7 Holding tray re-circulating bar motor M8 Holding ray X motor M9 Holding tray Y motor M10 Hopper motor (toner supply) M11 Hopper motor (toner stirrin
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING D.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING CL14 CL16 M18 M19 Figure 11-607 Symbol Name Motor M CL Clutch Notation Function M18 Right deck lifter drive M19 Left deck lifter drive CL14 Right deck pick-up CL16 Left deck pick-up Table 11-607 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-139 Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING E. Lamps, Heaters, and Photosensors DS3 LA2 DS2 TP3 TH LA1 DS1 MFSVR TS2 H3 TH2 TH1 VZ1 TP2 TP1 TS1 CNT2 CNT1 H2 H1 THHUM1 LF1 CB1 Figure 11-608 11-140 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Symbol Name C B Circuit breaker CNT Counter Photosensor Heater Lamp L F Line filter Variable resistor Thermistor Environment sensor Function Notation CB1 Circuit breaker CNT1 Total copy counter CNT2 Accessories copy counter DS1 Original size 1 detection DS2 Original size 2 detection DS2 Original size 3 detection H1 Fixing main heater H2 Fixing sub heater H3 Drum heater LA1 Scanning lamp LA2 Pre-exposure lamp LF1 Noise filter MFSVR Multifeeder
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING F. PCBs t o !1 y i !3 u q e !0 w r !2 Figure 11-609 11-142 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Ref.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING G. Paper Deck-A1 1. Sensors and Switches Q105 Q110 Q108 SW100 Q106 Q102 Q103 SW102 Q107 SW103 Q104 Figure 11-610a (paper deck-A1) 11-144 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Symbol Name Notation Photointerrupter Q102 Q103 Q104 Q105 Q106 Q107 Q108 Q110 Q Switches Microswitch Function Deck Deck Deck Deck Deck Deck Deck Deck lifter upper limit detection paper supply position detection set detection pick-up guide open detection vertical path paper detection pick-up paper detection paper absent detection lifter position detection SW100 Deck open switch SW102 Deck open detecting switch SW103 Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch Table 11-610a
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 2. Motors, Clutches, Solenoids, and PCBs SL101 CL101 CL102 M101 w q SL102 M102 Figure 11-610b (paper deck-A1) 11-146 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Symbol M CL S L Name Notation Function Motor M101 M102 Deck main motor Deck lifter motor Clutch CL101 CL102 Deck vertical path clutch Deck pick-up clutch Solenoid SL101 SL102 Deck pick-up roller releasing solenoid Deck open solenoid PCB q w Side deck driver PCB Open switch PCB Table 11-610b (paper deck-A1) COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING H. Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB Of the VRs, LEDs, and check pins used in the machine, those needed to service the machine in the field are discussed. Caution: 1.Some LEDs are dimly lit because of leakage current even when off; this is a normal condition and should be kept in mind. 2. VRs that may be used in the field............ VRs that must not be used in the field.....
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Size (vertical) SW101-2 SW101-2 SW101-3 Voltage OFF OFF — 100V AB OFF ON — 230V AB/Inch ON OFF — 230V A ON ON — 120V Inch Table 11-611 Caution: DIP SW 101-3 on the DC controller is for use at the factory only; do not touch it. Otherwise, the machine may malfunction. AB (4R4E) Ratio 200% 200.0% A4→A3, B5→B4 141.1% A4→B4 122.4% B4→A3, B5→A4 115.4% 100% 100.0% A3→B4, A4→B5 86.5% B4→A4 81.6% A3→A4, B4→B5 70.7% 50% 50.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Ratio A (2R2E) 200% 200.0% A4→A3 141.4% 100% 100.0% A3→A4 70.7% 50% 50.0% Table 11-614 Ratio AB/Inch (4R4E) 200% 200.0% A4/LTR→A3, B5→B4 141.4% A4/LTR→B4 122.4% B4→A3, B5→A4/LTR 115.4% 100% 100.0% A3→B4, A4/LTR→B5 86.5% B4→A4/LTR 81.6% A3→A4/LTR, B4→B5 70.7% 50% 50.0% Table 11-615 Description Connector J123 For factory J125 For factory J126 For factory J129 For factory Table 11-616 11-150 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 2. AC Driver PCB 1 J643 2 J644 1 2 1 4 J642 J641 2 9 1 J645 1 Figure 11-612 3. DC Power Supply PCB 8 5 J311 1 4 J304 1 2 1 J305 1 6 J306 1 J303 J301 1 4 5 5 J309 1 1 J308 J302 1 3 Figure 11-613 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-151 Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 4. Control CPU PCB 1 2 J923 1 9 B10 J911 B1 J915 A1 14 A10 J916 1 18 J913 1 18 J912 1 1 16 J920 1 15 J919 Figure 11-614 11-152 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 5. Holding Tray Driver PCB 1 4 J201 B13 B1 1 5 J203 J202 A1 A13 1 J204 13 1 J205 10 3 1 J210 6 1 J209 9 1 J208 7 J207 1 3 1 J206 Figure 11-615 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-153 Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 6. Potential Measurement PCB 1 4 1 J3 5 J1 1 4 J2 VR1 VR2 LED1 Figure 11-616 VR Description VR1 For factory VR2 For factory Table 11-617 LED LED1 Description ON while drum surface potential is being measured. Table 11-618 11-154 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 7. HVT1 PCB J301 1 3 1 2 J403 VR201 1 J203 5 1 4 1 J201 10 J202 Figure 11-617 VR VR201 Description For factory Table 11-619 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-155 Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 8. HVT2 PCB J501 T502 2 J404 1 J402 J401 T501 Figure 11-618 9. Inverter PCB 1 2 1 J956 J955 4 Figure 11-619 11-156 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 10. Lamp Regulator PCB 5 J503 1 1 6 J501 Figure 11-620 11. Counter PCB 1 J63 2 SW931 1 J65 5 1 2 ON Figure 11-621 Description SW931-1 SW931-2 0 0 Assumes that the sub counter is not connected. 1 0 Assumes that the sub counter is a small-size copy counter. 0 1 Assumes that the sub counter is a two-sided copy counter. 1 1 Assumes that the sub counter is a large-size copy counter. Table 11-620 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 12. Side Deck Driver (paper deck-A1) 2 1 6 B14 J3 1 J7 B1 J6 1 A1 J8 3 9 1 A14 J5 11 2 J9 J10 SW1 1 1 13 J11 1 6 J4 J103 1 1 2 Figure 11-622 11-158 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING VII. SERVICE MODE A. Outline The machine’s service mode is divided into the following six: Item *1* *2* *3* *4* *5* *6* Display Mode DISPLAY Display mode I/O DISPLAY I/O mode ADJUST Adjustment mode FUNCTION Function mode OPTION Options mode COUNTER Counter mode Table 11-701 Each mode has sub menus as explained on the pages that follow, and may be checked on the message display.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING B. Using Service Mode 1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch actuator. If you want to make checks while making copies (I/O display mode), set the appropriate copying mode. 2) Press the service mode switch with a hex key. • The machine starts service mode and indicates ‘$’ in the upper right corner of the message display. 3) Enter the number of the mode (See table 11-701.) you want for checks or adjustments using the ] key and the keypad; for example, ] , 3 , and ] .
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING TYP TYP LIGHT_5 MF_A6R LIGHT_5P MF_A4R AE_SLOP MF_A4 GLEAM_5 BOOK_ERA BRAKE_SC ATM REGIST DOC_ST LE_BLANK P_INT_RVL F_BLANK RFAE_F5L R_BLANK REAE_F9L TE_BLANK RFAE_F5R PRIMARY RFAE_F9R BIAS LA_LCKPS PRETRANS LA_SPEED TRN_1 RF_LENSY TRN_DUP 11×17PSZ TRN_OVL LGL_PSZ SEP_1 LTR_PSZ SEP_DUP LTRR_PSZ SEP_OVL STMT_PSZ C1_STMTR A3_PSZ C1_A4R A4_PSZ C2_STMTR A4R_PSZ C2_A4R A5_PSZ C3_STMTR B4_PSZ C3_A4R B5_PSZ C4_STMTR B5R_PSZ C4_A4R T
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING D. Display Mode ( ] Using the or 1 ]) key, select the appropriate screen. 1/9 Screen 1-1 Description Item Remarks Unit:°C FTMP Indicates the surface temperature (output of thermistor TH1) of the fixing roller. RTMP Indicates the machine internal temperature (output of temperature sensor on DC controller PCB). RHUM Indicates the machine internal humidity (output of humidity sensor on DC controller PCB).
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Item LIFT Description Indicates ‘1’ if the lifter position sensor does not turn on within 8 sec after the UP command for the lifter (paper deck/cassette) has been issued. Order of Indication • Paper Deck Type right deck, left deck, cassette 3, cassette 4, side paper deck (if installed) Remarks Resetting is by turning OFF and ON the power switch. • For LMP1 and LMP2, the activation control voltage value is indicated even when the scanning lamp is off.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 2/9 Screen 1-2 Description Item Remarks DPOT Indicates the surface potential of the drum. Unit: V VAE Indicates the average surface potential during AE measurement. Unit: V VL1T Indicates the VL1 (light area potential) target value. Unit: V VL1M Indicates the VL1 (light area potential) measured value. Unit: V VL2M Indicates the VL2 (developing bias light area potential) measured value. Unit: V VDT Indicates the VD (dark area potential) target value.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 3/9 Screen 1-3 Item Description PC Indicates the current value of the primary charging assembly. GRID Indicates the grid current value of the primary charging assembly. PTC Indicates the current value of the pre-transfer charging assembly. TC Indicates the current value of the transfer charging assembly. SC Indicates the current value of the separation charging assembly. BIAS Indicates the DC value of the developing bias.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 4/9 Screen 1-4 Item Description DCMET-1 Indicates the output of the original size sensor 1. DCMET-2 Indicates the output of the original size sensor 2. DCMET-3 Indicates the output of the original size sensor 3. DCMET-4 Indicates the output of the original size sensor 4. 11-166 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. Remarks CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 5/9 Screen 1-5 Item Description Remarks B-JAM0 Indicates the locations of the most recent and the second most recent jams that occurred in the machine. See Table 11-703. *3 B-JAM3 Indicates the locations of the third, fourth, and fifth most recent jams that occurred in the machine. See Table 11-703. B-JAM6 Indicates the sixth, seventh, and eighth most recent jams that occurred in the machine. See Table 11-703. B-ALRM *1 Not used.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 6/9 Screen 1-6 Item Description Remarks DF-JAM Indicates the location of the jam (in RDF). See Tables 11-708 through -710. S-JAM Indicates the location of the jam (sorter). See Table 11-704. DF-ERR *1 Indicates the results of self diagnosis (RDF). *2 S-ERR *1 Indicates the result of self diagnosis (sorter). *3 DF-ALM Indicates the nature of the alarm (RDF). See Table 11-707. S-ALM Indicates the nature of the alarm (sorter). See Tables 11-705 and -706.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Higher-Order 2 Digits Code Lower-Order 2 Digits Sensor Code Jam type Notation 01 Delay jam 01 Pick-up vertical path 0 PS24 02 Stationary jam 02 Pick-up vertical path 1 PS33 03 Power-on jam 03 Pick-up vertical path 2 PS36 04 *1 Double feeding jam 04 Pick-up vertical path 3 PS27 05 Timing jam 05 Pick-up vertical path 4 PS30 06 Sorter jam 06 Holding tray pick-up PS17 07 *2 RDF jam 07 Holding tray registration PS14 08 Holding tray feeding asse
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Sorter Alarm Code Tray Code 02 Type Overstacking Resetting Remove all sheets from the bins. Table 11-705 Stapler Code Resetting Type 01 Stapling down Run a self check. 02 Staple jam Open the front door, remove all staple jams, and close the front door. 03 Stapler safety mechanism ON Open the front door, remove all jams, and close the front door. 05 Stapler over capacity Remove all sheets from the bins. 06 Stapler capacity full Remove all sheets from the bins.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING RDF Alarm Code Type RDF 01 Re-circulating lever idle swing Stops Turn on and off the original sensor (S1). 03 Pick-up/separation failure Stops Turn on and off the original sensor (S1). 05 Original overriding paper stopper plate Stops Turn on and off the original sensor (S1), and open and close the RDF. 11 Change in number of originals after jam recovery Stops Turning on and off the original sensor (S1).
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING RDF Jam Code RDF-D1 Type Right pick-up Left pick-up Right/left pick-up Original left behind Sensor S5 Chronological sequence Code The belt motor (M3) rotates in reverse. S5 detects an original. 19 Original pulled out S1, S2 Pick-up motor (M1) turns on. S2 does not detect an original for a specific period of time. S1 does not detect an original. 21 Original pulled out S15, S27 The pick-up motor (M1) and the pick-up clutch (CL1) turn on.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Reversal Manual feed RDF-D1 Type Sensor Chronological sequence Manual feed pickup stationary S32 The feeding motor (M8) turns on. The original does not leave S32 after it has been fed an equivalent of 1000 mm. 91 Manual feed pick-up delay S20 The feeding motor (M8) turns on. The original is fed an equivalent of 1000 mm. S20 does not detect the original. 92 Manual feed pickup stationary S20 S20 detects an original for an equivalent of 750 mm or more.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Delivery RDF-D1 Type Sensor Delivery delay S5, S6 Chronological sequence Code S5 detects an original. The original is fed for an equivalent of 218 mm or more. S6 does not detect an original. 25 Delivery stationary S6 S6 detects an original for an equivalent of “length in feeding direction × 1.5” mm or more. 26 RDF open S31 The RDF is identified as being open. E2 The right or left cover is identified as being opened during operation.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 7/9 Screen 1-7 Item Description Remarks Q161 Indicates the version of the ROM (Q161) on the controller PCB. See “Guide to Version.” Q160 Indicates the version of the ROM (Q160) on the controller PCB. See “Guide to Version.” Q156 Indicates the version of the ROM (Q156) on the controller PCB. See “Guide to Version.” Q140 Indicates the version of the ROM (Q140) on the DC controller PCB. See “Guide to Version.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 8/9 Screen 1-8 Item Description KEY-CHK Indicates the code of the key pressed on the control panel. *1 DF-SIZE Indicates the size of the original detected by the RDF. DOC-SIZE Indicates the size of the original detected by the original size sensor of the copier. DOC-STS1 Indicates the output (0/1) of the original size sensor of the copier. *2 DOC-STS2 Indicates the output (0/1) of the original size sensor of the copier. *2 Remarks See Table 11-711.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Notation Key Notation Key Notation Key Notation Key 00. 0F Reset 05. 0F 7 0A. 0F 0 0F. 0F Pre-heat 01. 0F Stop 06. 0F Clear 0B. 0F 3 10. 0F Interrupt 02. 0F Start 07. 0F 2 0C. 0F 6 11. 0F User Mode 03. 0F 1 08. 0F 5 0D. 0F 9 12. 0F Guide 04. 0F 4 09. 0F 8 0E. 0F ID Table 11-711 *2: Corresponding original size sensor.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 9/9 Screen 1-9 Description Item Remarks MULTI Indicates the paper size sensor output and the width of the copy paper set in the multifeeder. WIDE : paper width sensor output (analog) SW : paper length sensor output (0/1) SIZE : paper width (mm) CST-1 Indicates the paper size sensor output and the width of the copy paper set in the cassette 1. WIDE : paper width sensor output (analog) SW : paper length sensor output (0/1) SIZE : paper width (mm) 100V model only.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING E. I/O Display Mode ( ] 2 ]) Using the keypad, select the appropriate screen. The display indicates the state of the input and output ports. Screen 2-1 Convert the bit data into hexadecimal data when making in terms of analog data (for example, address P023 photosensitive drum potential signal). COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-179 Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Address Description Notation Signal Jack Remarks P000-00 Pick-up motor drive signal M02 M2ON J114B-8 0: ON P000-01 Drum motor drive signal M01 M1ON J111B-4 0: ON P000-02 Developing fan drive signal FM05 FM5D J115A-1 1: ON P000-03 Developing clutch drive signal CL08 DEVCD J112A-2 1: ON P000-04 Holding tray feeding 1 clutch drive signal CL01 HTF1CD J112A-7 1: ON P000-05 Scanner locking solenoid drive signal SL01 SLCKSD J114A-12 1: ON P000-0
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Address Description Notation Signal Jack Remarks P001-00 Holding tray paper deflecting SL08 solenoid drive signal HTPDD J113B-9 1: ON P001-01 Holding tray weight solenoid drive signal SL07 HTWSD J113A-4 1: ON P001-02 Holding tray D-cut (pick-up) roller solenoid drive signal SL06 HTDSD J113A-5 1: ON P001-03 Fixing assembly inlet guide drive signal SL16 FXGDSD J108B-15 1: ON P001-04 Holding tray swing solenoid drive signal SL09 HTJSD J113B-5 1: ON
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Address Description P002-00 Pick-up vertical path 0 paper detection signal PS24 PS24D J116B-7 1: paper present P002-01 Stream reading home position detection signal PS04 SCDP2 J111A-8 0: home position P002-02 Registration paper detection signal PS23 RGPD J108A-7 1: paper present P002-03 Holding tray feeding assembly 2 paper detection signal PS09 PS9D J113B-12 1: paper present P002-04 Holding tray feeding assembly 1 paper detection signal PS08 PS8D J1
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Address Description Signal Jack P003-00 Left deck pick-up roll releasing solenoid drive signal SL05 LDPURR J121A-13 1: ON P003-01 CC-X count signal CCX10 CCXNTD J123-6 1: count up P003-02 High-voltage output enable signal HVT HVTRMT J114A-10 0: ON P003-03 Control card V drive signal CCV CCNTD J106B-1 1: count up P003-04 Feeding fan/cleaner fan drive signal (half speed) FM06/07 FM6D J109-1/ J114B-3 1: half speed P003-05 Feeding fan/cleaner fan dr
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Address Description P004-00 Scanner motor brake signal M03 M03BK J112B-5 1: ON P004-01 Scanner motor forward signal M03 M03FW J112B-7 0: forward 1: reverse P004-02 Scanner motor drive signal M03 M03ON J112B-6 0: ON P004-03 Scanner motor (current control) current limiter M03 M03CL J112B-4 1: ON P004-04 Scanner motor mode 1 signal M03 M03MD0 J112B-10 P004-05 Scanner motor mode 2 signal M03 M03MD1 J112B-9 P004-06 Scanner motor mode 3 signal M03
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Address Description Notation Signal Jack Remarks P005-00 Front door open detection signal SW03 FDOD J104A-3 1: open P005-01 Fixing/feeding unit detection signal PS53 FFUCNT J108A-2 0: connected P005-02 Internal delivery signal PS12 IDPD J108B-12 0: paper present P005-03 Multifeeder door open detection signal PS46 MFDC J105A-9 1: closed 0: open P005-04 External delivery signal PS10 EXDPD J108B-7 1: paper present P005-05 Fixing cleaning belt len
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Address Description P006-00 Hopper motor (toner stirring) drive signal M11 M10ON J105A-3 J105A-4 1: ON P006-01 Pre-exposure LED ON signal LED1 PEXP J103B-2 1: ON P006-02 Hopper motor (toner supply) drive signal M10 M11ON J105A-1 J105A-2 1: ON P006-03 Drum heater full-wave/halfwave switching signal H3 DHRD J102B-2 1: half wave 0: full wave P006-04 Total copy counter drive signal CNT1 TCNTD J104B-2 1: count up P006-05 Accessory copy counter drive si
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Address Description Notation Signal Jack Remarks P007-00 Upper right door open detection signal PS41 RUPDOP J119B-4 1: closed 0: open P007-01 Lower right door open detection signal PS42 RLWDOP J119B-7 1: closed 0: open P007-02 Copyboard cover closed signal PS05 CBCC J112A-4 1: closed 0: open P007-03 Scanner home position signal PS01 SCHP J111A-2 1: home position P007-04 Right deck open/closed detection signal PS38 RDEOP J116B-10 1: closed 0: ope
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Address Description Notation Signal Jack Remarks P008-00 Cassette 3 paper length 0 signal SV1 C3PL0 J122A-1 P008-01 Cassette 3 paper length 1 signal SV1 C3PL1 J122A-2 P008-02 Cassette 4 paper length 0 signal SV2 C4PL0 J122B-1 P008-03 Cassette 4 paper length 1 signal SV2 C4PL1 J122B-2 P008-04 Pick-up vertical path 3 paper detection signal PS27 PS27D J117B-4 1: paper present P008-05 Pick-up vertical path 4 paper detection signal PS30 PS30D J130B-
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Address Description Notation Signal Jack Remarks P009-00 Holding tray feeding unit detection signal HT HTFCNT J119A-2 0: connected P009-01 Fixing claw jam detection signal PS52 FXCJS J108A-19 1: paper present P009-02 Service switch detection signal SSW1 SSWON J106B-5 1: ON P009-03 Scanner locked detection signal PS48 SCLK J114A-14 1: locked P009-04 Left deck pick-up outlet paper detection signal PS49 LEXTPD J121B-5 1: paper present P009-05 Cas
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Address Description P011-00 Not used P011-01 Not used P011-02 Not used P011-03 Not used P011-04 Multifeeder pick-up solenoid drive signal P011-05 Internal signal (clock) P011-06 Not used P011-07 Pick-up motor brake signal Notation Signal Jack SL10 SL10D J115B-13 1: ON M02 M02BLK J114B-5 1: brake ON Address Description P012-00 Internal signal (digit) J125-1 P012-01 Internal signal (digit) J125-2 P012-02 Internal signal (digit) J125-3 P012-03
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Address Description Notation Signal Jack P020 Multifeeder paper width signal (analog) SVR1 P021 Cassette 1 paper width signal SVR4 C1PW J130B-10 P022 Cassette 2 paper width signal SVR5 C2PW J130A-12 P023 Photosensitive drum potential signal (analog) POT J103B-9 P024 Cassette 3 paper width signal SVR2 C3PW J117B-10 P025 Cassette 4 paper width signal SVR3 C4PW J117A-12 P026 Not used COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING RDF-D1 (1/6) Address Description Notation Signal Jack Remarks P027-00 Solenoid 2 drive signal SL2D 0: ON P027-01 Clutch 1 drive signal CL1D 0: ON P027-02 Solenoid 4 drive signal SL4D 0: ON P027-03 Solenoid 6 drive signal SL6D 0: ON P027-04 Solenoid 5 drive signal SL5D 0: ON P027-05 Solenoid 1 drive signal (released) SL1RD 0: OFF P027-06 Solenoid 1 drive signal SL1AD 0: ON P027-07 Solenoid over drive signal P028-00 Not used P028-01 Not used
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING RDF-D1 (2/6) Address Description Notation Signal Jack Remarks P030-00 Edge detection signal (S20) EDG 0: paper present P030-01 Registration detection signal (S3) RG1 0: paper detection P030-02 Belt motor clock detection signal (S11) BTLK Alternates between 0 and 1. P030-03 Pick-up motor clock detection signal (S9) PCLK Alternates between 0 and 1.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING RDF-D1 (3/6) Address Description Notation Signal Jack Remarks P036-00 Not used P036-01 Not used P036-02 Not used P036-03 Not used P036-04 DIP switch 1–5 detection signal 1: ON P036-05 DIP switch 1–6 detection signal 1: ON P036-06 DIP switch 1–7 detection signal 1: ON P036-07 Right cover open/closed detection signal (S23/S24) P037-00 Not used P037-01 Not used P037-02 Not used P037-03 Not used P037-04 Push switch 1 detection signal 1: ON P037-05
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING RDF-D1 (4/6) Address Description Notation Signal Jack Remarks P039-00 Re-circulating lever detection signal 2 (S30) RSC2 0: flag absent P039-01 Re-circulating lever detection signal (S29) RSC1 0: flag absent P039-02 Pick-up roller home position detection signal 1 (S8) PRHP1 1: home present P039-03 Skew detection signal 2 (S16) SKW2 1: paper detection P039-04 Paper pick-up signal 2 (S15) PDP2 1: paper detection P039-05 Power drop monitor signal P039-06
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING RDF-D1 (5/6) Notation Signal Jack Remarks Address Description P042-00 A/D demultiplexer select signal 1 P042-01 A/D demultiplexer select signal 2 P042-02 A/D demultiplexer select signal 3 P042-03 Encoder FV conversion adjustment signal P042-04 Feeding motor (M8) drive signal 0: ON P042-05 Feeding motor (CW) rotation signal 1: CW rotation P042-06 Feeding motor mode 1 signal P042-07 Feeding motor mode 2 signal P043-00 Skew detection signal 1 (S4) SKW1 0:
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING RDF-D1 (6/6) Address Description P056 Image leading edge sensor (S20) DA signal P057 Manual feed set sensor (S32) DA signal P058 Original sensor 2 (S27) DA signal P059 Not used P060 Original detection VA resistance (VR1) COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. Notation Signal Jack Remarks Hexadecimal (4 digits) Hexadecimal (4 digits) CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Stapler Sorter-E2 (1/8) Address Description Notation Signal Remarks P062-00 Feeding motor (M1) control signal P062-01 Push bar drive motor (M7) rotation control signal P062-02 Not used P062-03 Push bar drive motor (M7) drive signal P062-04 Guide bar motor (M8) pulse signal 1 GBMA 1: ON P062-05 Guide bar motor (M8) pulse signal 2 GBMB 1: ON P062-06 Guide bar motor (M8) pulse signal 3 GBMA 1: ON P062-07 Guide bar motor (M8) pulse signal 4 GBMB 1: ON P06
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Stapler Sorter-E2 (2/8) Address Description Notation Signal Jack Remarks P064-00 D/A converter serial signal P064-01 Not used P064-02 Feeding motor (M1) speed control signal P064-03 D/A converter load signal P064-04 D/A converter serial communication clock signal P064-05 Not used P064-06 Not used P064-07 Not used P065-00 Feeding motor (M1) CW rotation FDMCCW 1: ON P065-01 Feeding motor (M1) CCW rotation FDMCCW 1: ON P065-02 Stapler unit claw releasi
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Stapler Sorter-E2 (3/8) Address Description Notation Signal Jack Remarks P066-00 Bin shift motor (M9) drive signal 1: UP P066-01 Stapler until swing motor (M4) rotation signal 1: ON P066-02 Stapler unit swing motor (M4) drive signal 1: ON P066-03 Not used P066-04 Not used P066-05 Not used P066-06 Not used P066-07 Not used P067-00 Stapler unit shift home position signal (S2) P067-01 Logic voltage monitor signal P067-02 Not used P067-03 Bin paper sen
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Stapler Sorter-E2 (4/8) Address Description Notation Signal Jack Remarks P072-00 Matrix COM input signal 0 P072-01 Matrix COM input signal 1 P072-02 Matrix COM input signal 2 P072-03 Matrix COM input signal 3 P072-04 Matrix COM input signal 4 P072-05 Gear switching solenoid (SL4) drive signal P072-06 Not used P072-07 All solenoids drive signal P073-00 Stapling home position signal (Q1) SPL-HP 1: home position P073-01 Reference wall HP detection signal (
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Stapler Sorter-E2 (5/8) Address Description Notation Signal Jack Remarks P075-00 Stapling position LED4 ON signal 1: ON P075-01 Stapling position LED1 ON signal 1: ON P075-02 Add Staple LED ON signal 1: ON P075-03 Stapling position LED5 ON signal 1: ON P075-04 Stapling position LED2 ON signal 1: ON P075-05 Front access key LED ON signal 1: ON P075-06 Stapling position LED3 ON signal 1: ON P075-07 Staple key LED ON signal 1: ON P076-00 DIP switch 1-4
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Stapler Sorter-E2 (6/8) Address Description Notation Signal Jack Remarks P077-00 DIP switch 1-8 detection signal 1: ON P077-01 DIP switch 1-7 detection signal 1: ON P077-02 DIP switch 1-6 detection signal 1: ON P077-03 DIP switch 1-5 detection signal 1: ON P077-04 Front door open signal (MSW3) P077-05 Not used P077-06 Not used P077-07 Not used P078-00 Staple mode key check signal 1: ON P078-01 Stapler unit set detection signal 1: stapler unit presen
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Stapler Sorter-E2 (7/8) Address Description Notation Signal Jack Remarks P080-00 Staple Start key check signal 1: ON P080-01 Shift up key check signal 1: ON P080-02 Feeding guide home position detection signal (PI6) 1: ON P080-03 Bin paper detection signal (PI7) 1: paper present P080-04 Feeding guide UP signal (PI2) 1: UP P080-05 Not used P080-06 Not used P080-07 Not used P081-00 Not used P081-01 Not used P081-02 Not used P081-03 Not used P081-0
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Stapler Sorter-E2 (8/8) Address Description P091-00~07 Bin shift motor current (M9) D/A output P092-00~07 Guide bar drive motor current (M8) D/A output P093-00~07 Bin paper light adjustment (S4) D/A output P094-00~07 Push bar drive motor current (M7) P095-00~07 Bin paper sensor 2 light adjustment (S7) D/A output COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. Notation Signal Jack Remarks Hexadecimal (4 digits) CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Sorter-G1 (1/3) Address Description Notation Signal Jack Remarks P062-00 Joint signal (MS1) P062-01 Not used P062-02 Not used P062-03 Not used P062-04 Not used P062-05 Not used P062-06 Bin paper sensor P062-07 Not used P063-00 Not used P063-01 Not used P063-02 Not used P063-03 Not used P063-04 Not used P063-05 Not sued P063-06 Not used P063-07 Not used P064-00 Bin paper sensor P064-01 24V detection 1: power down P064-02 Bin HP sensor co
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Sorter-G1 (2/3) Address Description Notation Signal Remarks Jack P065-00 Feeding motor clock sensor PI6 FMCLK P065-01 Bin shift motor clock sensor PI9 BMCLK P065-02 Lead cam sensor PI2 LCHP 1: HP P065-03 Bin HP sensor PI3 BHP 1: HP P065-04 Guide bar HP sensor PI7 SGBHP 1: HP P065-05 Not used P065-06 Not used P065-07 Not used P066-00 Not sued P066-01 Not used P066-02 Guide bar swing motor pulse M3 signal 0 GBMA P066-03 Guide bar swing mot
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Sorter-G1 (3/3) Address Description Notation Signal Jack Remarks P068-00 DIP switch SW1 0: ON P068-01 DIP switch SW2 0: ON P068-02 DIP switch SW3 0: ON P068-03 DIP switch SW4 0: ON P068-04 Push switch SW2 0: ON P068-05 Push switch SW3 0: ON P068-06 Not used P068-07 Not used P069-00 Bin paper sensor D/A output 0 P069-01 Bin paper sensor D/A output 1 P069-02 Bin paper sensor D/A output 2 P069-03 Bin paper sensor D/A output 3 P069-04 Bin paper se
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Address Description Notation Signal Jack Remarks P097-00 P097-01 Primary charging wire cleaning motor drive signal M12 PCLM J103B-3 J103B-4 1/0: CW rotation 0/1: CCW rotation P097-02 P097-03 Pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor drive signal M13 PTRCLM J103A-1 J103A-2 1/0: CW rotation 0/1: CCW rotation P097-04 P097-05 Transfer/separation charging wire cleaning motor drive signal M06 TSCLM J108B-19 J108A-1 1/0: CW rotation 0/1: CCW rotation P097-06 Pri
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Address Description P100-00 Holding tray X motor (phase A) signal M09 M09A J113B-2 P100-01 Holding tray X motor (phase B) signal M09 M09B J113B-4 P100-02 Holding tray Y home position signal PS20 HTXHP J113A-10 P100-03 Holding tray X home position signal PS21 HTYHP J113B-1 P100-04 Lens X motor hold signal M04 M04ACM M04BCM J110A-3 J110A-6 P100-05 Lens X motor (phase A) signal M04 M04A J110A-1 J110A-2 P100-06 CVR PWM signal P100-07 Not used Addre
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Address Description Notation Signal Jack Remarks P102-00 Lens Y motor (phase A) signal M05 M05A J110A-10 J110A-11 P102-01 Lens Y motor (phase B) signal M05 M05B J110A-13 J110A-14 P102-02 Lens X home position signal PS06 LXHP J110A-8 1: HP P102-03 Lens Y home position signal PS07 LYHP J110B-2 1: HP P102-04 Internal signal (lens X operation complete) P102-05 Internal signal (lens Y operation complete) P102-06 Internal signal (holding tray X operatio
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Address Description P118-00 Digit 0 input P118-01 Digit 0 input P118-02 Digit 0 input P118-03 Digit 0 input P118-04 Digit 0 input P118-05 Digit 0 input P118-06 Digit 0 input P118-07 Digit 0 input Address Description P119-00 Digit 1 input P119-01 Digit 1 input P119-02 Digit 1 input P119-03 Digit 1 input P119-04 Digit 1 input P119-05 Digit 1 input P119-06 Digit 1 input P119-07 Digit 1 input Address Description P120-00 Digit 2 input P120-01 D
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Address Description P121-00 Digit 3 input P121-01 Digit 3 input P121-02 Digit 3 input P121-03 Digit 3 input P121-04 Digit 3 input P121-05 Digit 3 input P121-06 Digit 3 input P121-07 Digit 3 input Notation Signal Jack Remarks Jack Remarks Note: P122 through P124 are ports in the paper deck-A1.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Address Description P124-00 Deck paper supply position detection signal P124-01 Notation Signal Jack Remarks DPSP J2001B-1 1→0: paper supply position Deck paper absent detection Q108 signal DPE J2001B-2 1: paper present P124-02 Deck pick-up paper detection signal Q107 DPPD J2001B-3 1: paper detection P124-03 Deck vertical path paper detection signal Q106 DVPD J2001B-4 1: paper detection P124-04 Deck main motor brake signal M101 DMBRK J2001B-5 1: b
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING F. Adjustment Mode ( ] 3 ]) Using the or key, select the appropriate screen. Press the appropriate item to select. (The selected item is highlighted.) Enter a value, and press the OK key to store. Make a check by pressing the user mode key. 1/17 Screen 3-1 Item Description Settings Remarks LIGHT-5 Use it to adjust the reference activation voltage for the scanning lamp used during copying. –35~35 A higher setting decreases the copy density.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 2/17 Screen 3-2 Item Description BRAKE-SC Use it to adjust the degree of braking used when the scanner is moving in reverse. REGIST Use it to adjust the leading edge margin used during copying (registration). 11-216 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. Settings Remarks 0~100 A higher setting increases the degree of braking. –100~100 A higher setting delays the timing at which the registration roller turns on (decreasing the leading edge margin). Unit: 0.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 3/17 Screen 3-3 Item Description Settings Remarks LE-BLANK Use it to adjust the leading edge nonimage width (blanking exposure activation period). –100~100 A higher setting increases the leading edge non-image width. F-BLANK Use it to adjust the front margin (blank exposure lamp activation period). –100~100 A higher setting increases the front margin. R-BLANK Use it to increase the rear margin (blank exposure lamp activation period).
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 4/17 Screen 3-4 Item Description Settings PRIMARY Use it to adjust the application voltage correction value for the primary charging assembly. (It is pre-adjusted at the factory; enter the value recorded on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB.) 0~1023 BIAS Use it to adjust the developing assembly bias. (It is pre-adjusted at the factory; enter the value recorded on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 5/17 Screen 3-5 Description Settings TRN-1 Use it to adjust the current (1st side) for the transfer charging assembly. (It is pre-adjusted at the factory; enter the value recorded on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB.) Label value ±100 TRN-DUP Use it to adjust the current (2nd side of two-sided) for the transfer charging assembly.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 6/17 Screen 3-6 Description Settings SEP-1 Use it to adjust the current (1st side) for the separation charging assembly. (It is pre-adjusted at the factory; enter the value recorded on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB.) Label value ±200 SEP-DUP Use it to adjust the current (2nd side of two-sided) for the separation charging assembly.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 7/17 Screen 3-7 Item Description Settings Remarks C1-STMTR Use it to fine-adjust or enter the paper width basic value (STMTR) for the cassette 1. 000~255 100V model only. C1-A4R Use it to fine-adjust or enter the paper width basic value (A4R) for the cassette 1. 000~255 100V model only. C2-STMTR Use it to fine-adjust or enter the paper width basic value (STMTR) for the cassette 3. 000~255 100V model only.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 8/17 Screen 3-8 Item Description Settings C3-STMTR Use it to fine-adjust or enter the paper width basic value (STMR) for the cassette 3. 000~255 C3-A4R Use it to fine-adjust or enter the paper width basic value (A4R) for the cassette 3. 000~255 C4-STMTR Use it to fine-adjust or enter the paper width basic value (STMTR) for the cassette 4. 000~255 C4-A4R Use it to fine-adjust or enter the paper width basic value (A4R) for the cassette 4.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 9/17 Screen 3-9 Item Description Settings MF-A6R Use it to fine-adjust or enter the paper width basic value (A6R) for the multifeeder. 000~255 MF-A4R Use it to fine-adjust or enter the paper width basic value (A4R) for the multifeeder. 000~255 MF-A4 Use it to fine-adjust or enter the paper width basic value (A4) for the multifeeder. 000~255 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 10/17 Screen 3-10 Item Description Settings Remarks BOOK-ERA Use it to adjust the width for book frame erasing. 10~30 Unit:1 mm A higher setting increases the margin. ATM Use it to select an operating environment in relation to atmospheric pressure. 0: 1 to 0.75 atm (up to altitude of 2500 m) 1: 0.75 to 0.70 atm (up to altitude of 2500 to 3000 m) 2: 0.70 to 0.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11/17 Screen 3-11 Item Description Settings Remarks DOC-ST Us it to adjust the original stop position for the RDF. The RDF will switch position for left, right, and manual feed pick-up mechanisms. –1023~ 1023 Unit:0.5 mm The effective range is between –10 and +10, beyond which no change occurs. P-INTRVL * Use it to adjust the original-to-original distance for the RDF (2-on-1 mode). The RDF will switch position for left and right pick-up mechanisms. –1023~ 1023 Unit:0.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 12/17 Screen 3-12 Item Description Settings Remarks RFAE-F5L Use it to adjust the RDF scanning lamp reference activation voltage (left pick-up in AE mode). –1023~ 1023 A higher setting makes the slope gentle. RFAE-F9L Use it to adjust the RDF newspaper original intensity (left pick-up in AE mode). –1023~ 1023 A higher setting makes the slope steep. RFAE-F5R Use it to adjust the RDF scanning lamp reference activation voltage (right pickup in AE mode).
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Caution: Keep the following in mind when using ‘DOC-ST’, ‘P-INTRVL’, and ‘LA-SPEED’: 1. These items operate on the memory settings of the RDF controller PCB. You need not enter the settings if you merely initialized the copier's RAM, since they are retained by the RDF. 2.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 13/17 Screen 3-13 Item Description Settings Remarks LA-LCKPS Use it to adjust the image leading edge for the RDF-D1 (stream reading mode). 2300~ A higher setting 2500 advances the timing at which registration turns on, thereby increasing the margin. LA-SPEED Use it to adjust the original feeding speed in stream reading mode. –1023~ A higher setting 1023 increases the speed, thereby contracting the image.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 14/17 Screen 3-14 Description Item 11 × 17PSZ LGL_PSZ Use it to fine-adjust the paper jogging guide plate swing (duplexing unit) for each paper size. LTR_PSZ Use the item if pick-up faults occur or paper moves askew when pickup is from the duplexing unit or in two-sided/overlay copying. COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. Settings Remarks –10~+10 1 step = 0.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 15/17 Screen 3-15 Item LTRR_PSZ STMT_PSZ Description Use it to fine-adjust the paper jogging guide plate swing (duplexing unit) for each paper size. Use the item if pick-up faults occur or paper moves askew when pickup is from the duplexing unit or in two-sided/overlay copying. 11-230 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. Settings Remarks –10~+10 1 step = 0.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 16/17 Screen 3-16 Description Item A3_PSZ A4_PSZ Use it to fine-adjust the paper jogging guide plate swing (duplexing unit) for each paper size. A4R_PSZ A5_PSZ Use the item if pick-up faults occur or paper moves askew when pickup is from the duplexing unit or in two-sided/overlay copying. COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. Settings Remarks –10~+10 1 step = 0.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 17/17 Screen 3-17 Item B4_PSZ B5_PSZ Description Use it to fine-adjust the paper jogging guide plate swing (duplexing unit) for each paper size. B5R_PSZ Use the item if pick-up faults occur or paper moves askew when pickup is from the duplexing unit or in two-sided/overlay copying. 11-232 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. Settings Remarks –10~+10 1 step = 0.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING G. Function Mode ( ] 4 ]) Using the or key, select the appropriate item. Press the appropriate item to select. (The selected item is highlighted.) A press on the user mode key (*) will execute the selected item. Check to make sure that the machine is in standby before executing any item. 1/11 Screen 4-1 Item TONER-S Description Remarks Use it to supply toner during machine installation.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 2/11 Screen 4-2 Item ERROR 11-234 Description Remarks Use it to initialize E000, E001, E002, E003, E005, E013, E020, jam history, error history, sorter jam, RDF jam, or alarm history. However, initializing E000 or the like will not initialize the jam history. COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 3/11 Screen 4-3 Item Description DISP-LED Use it to turn on the LEDs on the control panel.* LCD-CHK Use it to turn on the LCD on the control panel. (The LCD back-light will turn off for 3 sec and then will turn on.) SCANLAMP Use it to turn on the scanning lamp. (At this time, the scanner cooling fan will also operate.) Remarks The lamp remains on for 3 sec.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 4/11 Screen 4-4 Description Item Remarks BLANK Use it to turn on the blanking exposure lamp. The lamp will remain on for 3 sec. PRE-EXP Use it to turn on the pre-exposure LED. The LED will remain on for 3 sec. HPPR-MTR Use it to turn on the hopper motor. (M10 and M11 rotate at the same time.) The motor operates for 3 sec. BK-ROT Use it to turn on the developing cylinder. The cylinder operates for about 2 min. 11-236 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 5/11 Screen 4-5 Item AE-ADJ Description Remarks Use it to execute density measurement level automatic adjustment for AE mode. If ‘0’ is indicated, set an F5 original. If ‘1’ is indicated, set an F9 original. COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-237 Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 6/11 Screen 4-6 Item Description Remarks NIP Use it to execute nip automatic measurement for the fixing roller. A solid black image will automatically be made and stopped at the fixing roller; it will automatically be discharged in 20 sec. See p. 11-40. PO-CONT Use it to turn on and off potential control. 1: OFF 0: ON 11-238 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 7/11 Screen 4-7 Item Description Remarks C1-STMTR Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paper width reference point 1 (STMTR) for the cassette 1. 100V model only. C1-A4R Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paper width reference point 2 (A4R) for the cassette 2. 100V model only. C2-STMTR Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paper width reference point 1 (STMTR) for the cassette 2. 100V model only.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 8/11 Screen 4-8 Item Description C3-STMTR Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paper width reference point 1 (STMTR) for the cassette 3. C3-A4R Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paper width reference point 2 (A4R) for the cassette 3. C4-STMTR Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paper width reference point 1 (STMTR) for the cassette 4. C4-A4R Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paper width reference point 2 (A4R) for the cassette 4.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 9/11 Screen 4-9 Item Description Remarks MF-A6R Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paper width reference point 1 (A6R) for the multifeeder. MF-A4R Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paper width reference point 2 (A4R) for the multifeeder. MF-A4 Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paper width reference point 3 (A4) for the multifeeder.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Caution: The “A6R” width is one of the basic values to be used when the paper width detecting VR is replaced for the multifeeder; however, note that the size label does not have a notation indicating “A6R”, and you will not feel a click on the width guide. Keep in mind that A6R is A4 paper folded in fourths, and its width is 105 mm. 10/11 Screen 4-10 Remarks Description Item RFSKEW Use it to execute skew adjustment of the RDF.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11/11 Screen 4-11 Item RAM-INIT Description Use it to initialize the RAM on the DC controller PCB. COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. Remarks After initialization, the screen changes to the Copying Standard screen. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-243 Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING H. Options Mode ( ] 5 ]) Using the or key, select the appropriate screen. Press the appropriate item to select. (The selected item will be highlighted.) Enter the appropriate value using the keypad. Use user mode to set/cancel each mode. 1/9 Screen 5-1 Description Item Remarks SHUT-OFF Use it to turn on or off the auto shut-off function. 1: OFF 0: ON DENS-ID Use it to change the copy density notation.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 2/9 Screen 5-2 Item Description Remarks DK-SZ-R Use it to change the paper size for the right deck. 0: A4 1: LTR 2: B5 DK-SZ-L Use it to change the paper size for the left deck. 0: A4 1: LTR 2: B5 SDK-SZ Use it to change the paper size for the paper deckA1. 0: A4 1: LTR 2: B5 COPY-LIM Use it to change the upper limit (number of copies; between 1 and 999). CALL-SW 1. You may select any available space in the current mode. 2.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 3/9 Screen 5-3 Item M-NOTATI 11-246 Description Remarks Use it to change the paper size choices for the multifeeder. COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 4/9 Screen 5-4 Item Description Remarks U-NOTATI Use it to change the notation for the universal cassette. 0: U1, U2, U3, U5 1: paper size selected by CST-GRP AE-SW Use it to select the RDF’s AE or the copier’s AE. (Normally, the RDF’s AE is used when the RDF is in use; select the copier’s AE if the RDF’s AE fails for some reason.) Note: Stream reading is not executed if the RDF’s AE is disabled. 1: Copier 0: RDF DOC-F-SW Use it to turn on and off stream reading.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 5/9 Screen 5-5 Description Item CST-GRP1 Use it to select the paper notation if universal cassette notation (U-NOTARI) is set to ‘1’. 0: G LTR (indicated as LTR) 1: K LGL (indicated as U) CST-GRP2 Use it to select the paper notation if universal cassette notation (U-NOTARI) is set to ‘1’.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 6/9 Screen 5-6 Item Description Remarks FUZZY Use it to control (fuzzy) the current applied to the pre-transfer, transfer, and separation charging assembly to suit the ambient temperature; or, to prohibit it and select one of three environment settings.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 7/9 Screen 5-7 Description Remarks IDL-SW Use it to enable or disable idle rotation mode to prevent distorted images in high humidity conditions or if the images are too light, say in the morning. 0: OFF (no idle rotation) 1: ON (control at IDLMODE setting) IDL-MODE Use it to switch idle rotation mode when the power is turned on while the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 75°C or less.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 8/9 Screen 5-8 Description Item F-POT-SW Enter ‘1’ if transfer/separation faults occur because of a fault in the sensor. Use it as a temporary remedy until replacement of the potential sensor. F-POT-D Use it together with ‘F-POT-SW’ (0 changed to 1). 0: if image ratio of originals (text) is low 1: if image ratio of originals (photo) is high 2: not used usually, but re-transfer (white spot at 50 mm along leading edge) occurs.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 9/9 Screen 5-9 Item Description SCAN_SEL Use it to enable or disable the original size detection function for the RDF. ON: If the selected mode does not require detection of original size (APS, AMS, frame erasing, etc.), correction is made when assuming an original size considering the paper size and the selected ratio. 0: OFF 1: ON 2SIDE_SL Use it to specify two-sided mode as the standard mode (one-sided to two-sided).
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING I. Counter Mode ( ] 6 ]) Using the or key, select the appropriate screen. Press the appropriate counter mode (to highlight), and press the C key on the control panel while holding down the service switch, the counter will return to '00000000'. 1/5 Screen 6-1 Description Item Remarks L-TOTAL Large size copy total copy counter (300 mm long or more; or, non-default size) After '99999999', returns to '00000000'.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 2/5 Screen 6-2 Item Description Remarks L-OVERLAY Large size copy copy counter (2nd side of overlay; 300 mm long or more; or, non-default size) After '99999999', returns to '00000000'. L-2-SIDE Large size copy copy counter (2nd size of twosided; 300 mm long or more; or, non-default size) After '99999999', returns to '00000000'. L-DF Large size original feed counter (300 mm long or more; or, non-default size) After '99999999', returns to '00000000'.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 3/5 Screen 6-3 Description Item Remarks S-TOTAL Small size copy total copy counter (less than 300 mm long; or, non-default size) After '99999999', returns to '00000000'. S-MULTI Small size copy copy counter for multifeeder (less than 300 mm long; or, non-default size) After '99999999', returns to '00000000'.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 4/5 Screen 6-4 Item Description Remarks S-OVERLAY Small size copy copy counter (2nd side of overlay; less than 300 mm long; or, non-default size) After '99999999', returns to '00000000'. S-2-SIDE Small size copy copy counter (2nd side of twosided; less than 300 mm long; or, non-default size) After '99999999', returns to '00000000'. S-DF Small size original feed counter (less than 300 mm long) After '99999999', returns to '00000000'.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 5/5 Screen 6-5 Description Item Remarks WEB Copy counter for after replacing the fixing cleaning belt (alarm is issued when service mode starts after having made 250,000 copies using the data) After ‘99999999’, returns to '00000000'. WSTTNR Copy counter for after disposing of the waste toner from the case (alarm is issued when service mode starts after having made 250,000 copies using the data) After ‘99999999’, returns to '00000000'.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING n Count Increments q TOTAL • 1st side of an overlay/two-sided copy when the sheet is stacked on the holding tray • one-sided copy or 2nd side of an overlay/two-sided copy when the sheet is discharged outside the machine (in the bin if a sorter is installed) w OVERLAY, 2_SIDE • overlay/two-sided copy when the sheet is discharged outside the machine e MULTI, CST • when the sheet is discharged outside the machine.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING VIII. SELF DIAGNOSIS The microprocessor on the machine’s DC controller PCB is equipped with a mechanism that checks the condition of the machine (of its sensors, in particular), and indicates an error code when it detects a fault. A.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Code E010 E013 E015 E020 E030 E031 E043 Cause • Main motor (M1; fault) • DC controller PCB (fault) • After the main motor drive signal has been generated, 2 or more pulses are not received every 1 sec. • Waste toner feeding screw (error) • DC controller PCB (fault) • The waste toner feeding screw cannot rotate, and the switch (MSW4) is pressed several times within a specific period of time.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Code Cause Description • Holding tray Y home position sensor (PS20; fault) • Holding tray Y motor (M9; fault) • DC controller PCB (fault) • While the holding tray Y motor (M9) drive signal is being generated, the holding tray Y home position signal (HTYHP) is not generated within 4 sec. • While the holding tray Y motor (M9) drive signal is being generated, the holding tray Y home position signal (HTYHP) is generated for 2 sec or more.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Code Cause Description • Scanner locked sensor (PS48; fault) • Scanner locking solenoid (SL1; fault) • DC controller PCB (fault) • During copying in stream reading mode, the scanner locked sensor signal (SCLK) is not generated within a specific period of time. • The scanner does not stop at the scanner original leading edge 2 sensor (PS4). • Lamp regulator (fault) • DC controller PCB (fault) • During standby, the scanning lamp turns on.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Code E800 E802 Cause Description • Auto power-off circuit (open circuit) • DC controller PCB (fault) • The auto power-off has an open circuit. • The auto power-off signal is generated twice or more within 2 sec. • Auto power-off circuit (fault) • DC controller PCB (fault) • The relay (RY401) in the power supply unit does not operate in response to the auto power-off signal. Caution: 1.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING B. RDF-D1 Code Cause Description • Data communication (with copier) • The communication is monitored at all times. The error occurs when there is an interruption for 5 sec. • Pick-up roller sensor (S8, S21; fault) • Pick-up motor (M1; fault) • Pick-up clutch (CL1; fault) • Initialization does not end in 2 sec. (The flat face of the pick-up roller/Dcut roller is at top, and is at home position.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Note: When the self-diagnosis has turned on, you can reset the machine by turning it off once. If the RDF is out of order, disconnect the lattice connector on the RDF side, open the RDF, and set the original on the copyboard glass to continue to make copies. COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-265 Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING C. Sorter Code Cause Description E500 • The CPU (Q1) or the communications IC (Q3) on the sorter controller PCB is not operating normally. • An error in the communication between sorter and copier occurred. E510 • Feeding motor (M1; fails) • Feeding guide (up/down mechanism, interference, etc.) • The clock signal from the motor remains off for 250 msec. • Push bar motor (M7; fails) • After the motor drive signal has been generated, the operation does not end in 2 sec.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING n Sorter • Error Indication, Error Description, Detection Timing Code E532 E533 Cause • Stapler unit shift motor (M3; fails) • After the motor drive signal has been generated, the operation does not end in 5000 msec. • Stapler paper sensor automatic adjustment (fault) • The stapler automatic adjustment mechanism fails, or the automatic adjustment setting has an error.
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11-268 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
APPENDIX A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ..........A-1 B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS ...A-2 C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM....A-5 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. D. PAPER DECK-A1 GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM......................................A-7 E. SPECIAL TOOLS LIST .................A-9 F. SOLVENTS AND OILS..................A-10 CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
!" A.
, ## "" !"# , GENERAL TIMING CHART II (CONSOLIDATED) • Copier + RDF-D1 + Stapler Sorter-E2 • A4, 2 Originals, 2 Copies, Right Deck Pick-Up; RDF Right Pick-Up (stream reading); Sorter Double Stapling INTR : motor CW rotation SCRV SCFW SCFW* 1st copy of 1st 2nd copy of 1st original original : motor CCW rotation SCFW* SCRV SCFW SCRV 1st copy of 2nd 2nd copy of 2nd original original LSTR Controlled to 200°C (205°C) 1 Fixing main heater (H1) 2
B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS What follow below is a list of signals and abbreviation used in the chapters of the manual and circuit diagrams. The abbreviations within parentheses represent analog signals, shich cannot be expressed in terms of ‘1’ or ‘0’. 1.
A-4 SCANNER MOTOR SPEED signal SCANNER MOTOR REPRODUCTION RATIO SELECT (0) command SCANNER MOTOR REPRODUCTION RATIO SELECT (1) command SCANNER MOTOR REPRODUCTION RATIO SELECT (2) command SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE command SCANNER MOTOR PLL CONTOL command LENS X MOTOR (A) command LENS X MOTOR (HOLD) command LENS X MOTOR (B) signal LENS Y MOTOR (A) signal LENS Y MOTOR (HOLD) signal LENS Y MOTOR (B) signal HOLDING TRAY X MOTOR (A) command HOLDING TRAY X MOTOR (B) command HOLDING TRAY X MOTOR (HOLD) command HOLDING T
C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM not available COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
D. PAPER DECK-A1 GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM not available COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
APPENDIX E. SPECIAL TOOLS No. 1 Tool name Door switch Shape Tool number Remarks Rank* TKN-0093 A Point of use Front door 2 Cleaning oil A Use to clean the fixing roller. (10 packs/box) B Use to adjust the No. 1 and No. 2 mirror position. (front and rear in a pair) FY9-3012 B Use to check the potential sensor. FY9-3014 B Use to check the environment sensor. CK-0054 TKN-0464-000 CLEANNING OIL HUILE DE NETTOYAGE CANON INC.
APPENDIX F. SOLVENTS AND OILS No. 1 Description Ethyl alcohol (Etanol) Isopropyl alcohol (Isopropanol) Composition Use Description Cleaning: e.g., glass, plastic, rubber parts; external covers C2H5O (CHZ3)2 CHOH • Do not bring near open fire. • Procure localy. • Isopropyl alcohol may be substituted. 2 MEK Cleaning: e.g., metal; oil or toner CH3COC2H5 • Do not bring near fire. • Procure locally. 3 Heat-resisting grease Lubricating; e.g.
Prepared by OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPARTMENT 1 OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIVISION CANON INC. Printed in Japan REVISION 0 (JULY 1997) [18723] 5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302 Japan Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
This publication is printed on 70% reprocessed paper. PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON) 0797S2.11-1 Download service manual and resetter printer at http://printer1.blogspot.
